JP2022066453A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a game by using music that is at least outputted in a period when the games is being performed.

SOLUTION: The game machine includes output means for outputting music at least in a period when a game by a player is being performed, and sound emission means for emitting a notification sound, by a trigger of the occurrence of an event generated by a progress of the game, for notifying the generation of the event. The sound emission means includes code specification means for specifying a cod of a music at the timing when the sound emission is performed, and pitch determination means for determining the pitch of a notification sound when the sound emission is performed, on the basis of the specified code by the code specification means.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 29

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various production images such as variable effects (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on display means such as liquid crystal displays to improve the interest of games (for example). Patent Document 1). While such an effect is being performed, background music (Back Ground Music: BGM) is output from the gaming machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-046635

By the way, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game by using this BGM.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is intended to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by using music output at least during a period in which the game is being played. I am aiming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 dynamically displays identification information on a determination means that makes a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the player is given a predetermined game value. An output means for outputting music at least during the period in which the game is being played by the player, and a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of the event caused by the progress of the game. The music is provided with a sounding means for producing the sound, and the sounding means has a pitch corresponding to the music output at the timing of sounding the notification sound as the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded. It is provided with a pitch selection means selected based on.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a determination means that makes a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display execution that causes the display means to execute dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. It is provided with means, and when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the player is given a predetermined game value at least. An output means for outputting music during the period in which the player is playing a game, and a sounding means for sounding a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game. As the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded, the sound pitch corresponding to the music output at the timing of sounding the notification sound is selected based on the progressing music. Since it is equipped with high-selection means, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first accessory, and (b) is a diagram showing the schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of a jackpot variation pattern table. FIG. 2D is a schematic diagram schematically showing an out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table, and (e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an out-of-order (probability variation) variation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the various data stored in the RAM in the voice lamp control device. It is a timing chart which showed the example of the operation timing of the 1st accessory. As an example of the variation effect, it is a timing chart showing the effect execution timing when the detailed variation pattern is a pseudo-ream. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table for variation schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of an additional data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the sound editing / output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the sound editing / output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the start winning sound output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the start winning sound output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a figure which showed the sounding timing of the entry sound when the ball enters the 1st entry opening one by one during one beat of BGM. (A) is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming sound when three balls enter the first entrance during one beat of BGM, and (b) is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming sound. The sound of two balls entering the first entrance during the beat, and one more ball entering the first entrance until the back beat of the next beat. It is a figure explaining the sounding timing of, and (c) shows that one ball enters the first ball entrance during one beat of BGM, and further until the back beat of the next one beat. It is a figure explaining the sounding timing of the entry sound when two balls enter the first entry opening. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the confirmed command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing the demo command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hold image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the sound editing / output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the start winning sound output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the various data stored in the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table for variation schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the detailed variation pattern setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the sound editing / output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the sound editing / output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the start winning sound output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the start winning sound output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the start winning sound output processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the start winning sound output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 43, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and is accompanied by a ball entering the first entry port 64 (starting start winning), which will be described later. Various effects such as variable effects and reach effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a "town center stage" with a town motif, a "sea stage" with a sea motif, a "mountain stage" with a mountain motif, etc. are prepared as stages. The stage change is performed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period during which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation.

Further, when the normal reach effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal reach. It is configured as follows. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. For example, on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, illumination portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information.

The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launching unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port (starting port) 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and a fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display fluctuations by indicating whether or not the fluctuation is in progress due to the entry into the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) by the lighting state, or the stop symbol after the fluctuation is completed. As a result, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is shown by the lighting state, or the ball (reserved ball) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry opening 64. The number of reserved balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, whether or not it is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the type of the big hit is also determined. .. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and time saving jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, the "time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low-probability state and becomes a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. In the high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) described later is increased, and the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64 is released. By making it easier, the game state in which the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64 is included.

On the other hand, the "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the time-saving state (during time-saving) in the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) increases. It refers to a state of a game in which a ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64 by making it easier for the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 to be opened.

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, the time for the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 to open or one hit in the second symbol according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed. For example, in the low-probability state, the time-saving state or the high-probability state, the opening time of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entry port 64 may be longer than in other gaming states. Further, the time-saving state or the high-probability state in the low-probability state may be a state in which the number of times the electric accessory is released per one time in the second symbol is larger than in other gaming states.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that displays the variation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display of the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 configured (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol (ordinary symbol) triggered by the passage of a ball in the second entry port 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a first accessory 87, which is a movable accessory for the advance notice effect.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIGS. 6 and 12) described later, for example, left and middle. And the three symbol columns on the right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 in accordance with the control of the main control device 110, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. It is a decorative display according to the above. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", and the main symbol with an odd number (1,3,5,7,9) is , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc., which is almost full on the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that it is small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 displays a variation in which the same main symbols are aligned. However, it is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols (“high probability symbol” and “probability variation symbol”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the big hit, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers are added (“low probability symbol”, “normal symbol”) are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of the above is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, and is the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be given, such as by putting it out.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one variation display is performed as one aspect of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is configured so that a so-called "pseudo-ream" in which the pseudo-variation of the third symbol is continuously performed a plurality of times can be performed. "Pseudo-ream" is a kind of advance notice effect that suggests the expectation of a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display in which the pseudo-ream is executed. The variation effect is performed according to the mode in which the pseudo variation) is repeatedly performed.

In the "pseudo-ream", as the number of repetitions of pseudo-stop and re-variation performed during this one variation display (that is, the number of times the pseudo-variation is continuously performed) increases, a jackpot is given after the variation display. The number of repetitions is determined so as to increase expectations. As a result, the player can feel that the possibility of becoming a big hit increases as the pseudo-variation is repeatedly performed during one variation display. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game for the player by performing the variable production by the "pseudo-ren".

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, the reserved ball does not exist.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, the front frame 12, etc. are provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls is increased according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. May be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The first accessory 87 is a disk-shaped movable accessory in the front view of the game area, and is used for the advance notice effect. The first accessory 87 is normally located at the origin position as an initial position, is stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86, and is invisible to the player. Then, when the advance notice effect is performed by the first accessory 87, the first accessory 87 operates as follows.

That is, the first accessory 87 descends from the center frame 86 at an arbitrary timing of the variation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, and moves up and down when it reaches a certain position. When the fluctuation effect becomes a big hit, after the first accessory 87 moves up and down, it descends to the maximum descending position (maximum point position) and rotates clockwise in the front view of the game area (direction of arrow A in FIG. 2). By operating, a notice effect (so-called one-shot notification effect) is performed to announce that the fluctuation effect will be a big hit.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation effect is out of alignment, the first accessory 87 does not descend to the maximum point position after moving up and down, but rises and is stored in the upper side of the center frame 86 again. As a result, while the first character 87 is moving up and down, the player can expect the first character 87 to descend to the maximum point position and become a big hit, which enhances the interest in the game. Can be done. Further, when the first accessory 87 descends to the maximum point position, it is possible to give the player a great joy and a sense of superiority to be a big hit.

An LED (not shown) is built in the vicinity of the rotation center of the first accessory 87, and by turning on or blinking the LED in conjunction with the rotation operation of the first accessory 87, the advance notice effect is further enhanced. Be emphasized. In addition, an image in which the brightness around the first accessory 87 is increased in accordance with the operation of the first accessory 87 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the advance notice effect by the first character 87 is further emphasized, and the joy of the player can be further enhanced.

Here, the configuration of the first accessory 87 will be described with reference to FIG. 5A. The first accessory 87 adopts a rack-and-opinion method as a configuration for moving the first accessory 87 up and down, and has a first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, a drive gear 87b which is a gear, and a driven gear. It has 87c and a slide gear 87d. Further, although not shown, a first accessory rotation motor 87e (see FIG. 6) for rotating the first accessory 87 is provided. When the first accessory rotation motor 87e is driven, the first accessory 87 rotates clockwise in the front view of the game area (direction of arrow A in FIG. 2).

The first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is a stepping motor, and by applying a pulse signal, the drive gear 87b is driven and rotated in a given step unit. The driven gear 87c is meshed with the drive gear 87b and is driven to rotate by the rotational force of the drive gear 87b.

The first slide gear 87d is a flat plate-shaped rod with teeth cut, and is tooth-engaged to the driven gear 87c so that it can reciprocate in the vertical direction as the driven gear 87c rotates. .. The first accessory 87 is connected to the lower end of the first slide gear 87d.

Therefore, by driving and rotating the drive gear 87a in step units by the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, the slide gear 87d moves in the vertical direction in step units via the driven gear 87c. Along with this, the first accessory 87 can be moved up and down in the range from the origin position to the maximum point position. In the pachinko machine 10, when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position and the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a is driven by 100 steps in the direction in which the first accessory 87 descends, the first accessory 87 is driven. Is configured to reach the maximum point position.

The drive control of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e is a voice lamp described later that controls the output of voice and the lighting and extinguishing of the illumination units 29 to 33, the indicator lamp 34, and the like. This is done by the control device 112.

A protrusion 87f is provided at the upper end of the slide gear 87d. Further, the origin detection sensor 88 is provided at the position of the protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position. Further, the maximum point detection sensor 89 is provided at the position of the protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position.

Here, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 88 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 88. Since the maximum point detection sensor 89 has the same configuration as the origin detection sensor 88, the description thereof will be omitted.

The origin detection sensor 88 includes a light emitting element mounting portion 88a to which a light emitting element (not shown) is attached, a light receiving element mounting portion 88b to which a light receiving element (not shown) is attached, and one end of the light emitting element mounting portion 88a. It is a U-shaped sensor composed of a connecting portion 88c that connects one end of the light receiving element mounting portion 88b so that the light emitting element and the light receiving element are arranged so as to face each other at a distance of a predetermined distance. The detection groove 88d is formed by the portion 88a, the light receiving element mounting portion 88b, and the connecting portion 88c.

When there is no insert in the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element mounting portion 88a is received as it is by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element mounting portion 88b. On the other hand, when an insert is inserted into the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element mounting portion 88a is blocked, and the light received by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element mounting portion 95b receives the light. Can not. The origin detection sensor 88 outputs an off signal when light is received by the light receiving element and an on signal when light is not received, so that some insert is inserted in the detection groove 88d in the control device that receives the signal. It can be determined whether or not it has been inserted.

In this origin detection sensor 88, the light emitting element mounting portion 88a is arranged on the front side in front view, the light receiving element mounting portion 85b is arranged on the rear surface side in front view, the connecting portion 88c is arranged on the left side in front view, and the first accessory 87 is located at the origin position. The protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d is inserted into the detection groove 88d so as to block the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element. Therefore, when the origin detection sensor 88 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the control device serves as the first function by outputting an on signal from the origin detection sensor 88. It can be determined that the object 87 has reached the origin position.

Further, the maximum point detection sensor 89 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 88, the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position, and the protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d is inside the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 89. It is attached so that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked by being inserted. Therefore, when the maximum point detection sensor 89 detects that the light radiated from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the control device can output an on signal from the maximum point detection sensor 89. 1 It can be determined that the accessory 87 has reached the maximum point position.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯”), the first ball entry port 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. Is configured to be). The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and the number of times of passing through the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example). , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port (starting winning port) 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the first ball entry port switch. Then, a big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110, and the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after the lapse of a predetermined variation time, the variation display is stopped, the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed with the third symbol. The stop display is displayed on the effective line L1 of the device 81. Further, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entry port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and temporarily stores various data and the like when executing a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201 and a control program stored in the ROM 202. It has a built-in RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and an outlier variation pattern table 202d as fixed value data used to control these processes. Further, the RAM 203 controls the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 (big hit lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83, etc.). Various counters are provided for this purpose.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 will be described. First, FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

To set the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. , The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for the variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), or at an interval of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 22). Further, some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 22). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203b is an area for storing the value of each updated counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203b at the update timing of the counter for each counter. Update the counter.

The RAM 203 is provided with a hold ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas). The hold area is each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer 203b according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. This is an area for temporarily storing (holding). Further, the execution area stores the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the fluctuation pattern and the stop type of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation effect at the start timing of the fluctuation. It is an area to do.

When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting winning), each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer 203b at that time. The value is stored in one of the reserved first to fourth areas. At this time, if there is no hold in the hold area and all of the hold first to fourth areas are empty areas, the value of each counter is stored in the hold first area. When there is only one hold in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. When there are two holds in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first to second areas, the value of each counter is stored in the hold third area. When there are three holdings in the holding area and the value of each counter is stored only in the holding first to third areas, the value of each counter is stored in the holding fourth area.

As a result, the values of the counters acquired from the counter buffer 203b at the timing of the start winning are stored in the hold 1st area, the hold 2nd area, the hold 3rd area, and the hold 4th area in the order of the start winning. Can be done. If a start prize is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the reserved 1st to 4th areas, the value of each counter at that time is discarded without being reserved. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to a maximum of four starting prizes.

Further, when the start timing of the variation effect is reached, the MPU 201 moves the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved first area to the execution area. Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, a big hit lottery and a determination of the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol are performed.

Further, after the value of each counter in the hold 1st area is moved to the execution area, the value of each counter stored in the hold 2nd area is shifted to the vacant hold 1st area and stored in the hold 3rd area. The value of each counter is shifted to the vacant second area of hold, and the value of each counter stored in the fourth area of hold is shifted to the vacant third area of hold. As a result, when the variation effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203c, the holding is reduced by one and one area of the holding area is opened.

Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first random number counter C1 is a counter to be used for the big hit lottery, and is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). The first random number counter C1 is updated by adding 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is done by returning to 0 afterwards. In addition, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and then returns to the initial value at the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is used. The value of is set as a new initial value in the random number counter C1 per first, and the value is updated from the initial value.

As described above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used for the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. For example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also composed of a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is not only updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), but is also updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

The value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. Then, at the start of fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is a random number value (big hit random number value, also referred to as a hit value) that is a big hit, and a big hit. A lottery will be held. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot (big hit random number value) is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and is the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c (to be exact, the reserved ball storage area 203c). ), When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a shows the value (big hit random number value) of the first hit random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot. In this jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot random number value referred to when the gaming state is in the low probability state (that is, the period during which the probability change is not in progress) and the jackpot random number value referred to in the game state in the high probability state (that is, during the probability change). The number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. Further, the number of jackpot random numbers that become jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the values "7,307,582" are associated with the "low probability state" and stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. .. On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers that become jackpots in a high probability state is 30, and the values "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420, 420," 448,486,506,534,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 "is associated with the" high probability state "in the jackpot random number table 202a. It is stored.

When determining the jackpot, the MPU 201 reads the jackpot random number value suitable for the game state at that time from the jackpot random number table 203a. Then, in the MPU 201, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 (first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c) used for the jackpot determination is the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 203a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of the above, and if it matches, it is determined to be a big hit.

That is, when the gaming state is a low probability state, a big hit is obtained when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any one of "7,307,582". Since the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300. When the gaming state is a high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420, 420, 448,486,506,534,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892 ”is a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state are not duplicated. The jackpot random number value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, that value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes the big hit according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), it becomes a big hit. Since the value of the random number can be difficult to predict, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of various counters provided in the RAM 203 will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) is added. In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry slot 64 (starting prize), for example. Together with the first random number counter C1, it is stored in any of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the hold area 1 in the hold ball storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect. Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the hold area 1 in the hold ball storage area 203c is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the big hit. .. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 8B. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, "15R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and 100. There is a "15R normal jackpot" in which the time is shortened during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value “40 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79 ”is associated with it, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. .. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, a 15R normal jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 20% probability. .. The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 determines the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") when it is out of order. That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81. The stop types selected in the present embodiment include "front and back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the final stop symbol after the same reach occurs. There are three stop (directing) patterns: "reach other than front and back," which stops except before and after the reach symbol, and "completely off," where reach does not occur.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 It is stored in any of the holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the holding ball storage area 203c. Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the hold area 1 in the hold ball storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the stop type in the variation effect. Is the one at the time of disengagement. In this case, the stop type at the time of disconnection is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area.

In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random values selected for the stop type, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easier to select "completely off". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to "reach before and after" and "reach other than front and back" is narrow, with 98,99 for "reach outside front and back" and 90 to 97 for "reach other than front and back", and "front and back". It becomes difficult to select "reach out of reach" or "reach other than out of front and back".

In the low probability state, a table with a narrow random value range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is selected in order to secure the ball entry time into the first entry port 64. It becomes difficult to select "completely off". In this table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is a loop counter for use in determining a variation pattern. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. There is. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 22) described later, and is also updated repeatedly within the remaining time in the main process.

At the start of the fluctuation, the MPU 201 refers to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b and the fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202, and determines the fluctuation pattern to be executed in the fluctuation effect. The fluctuation pattern determined here is the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation.

That is, the main control device 110 determines only the fluctuation time of the symbol variation as the variation pattern. The specific variation mode is set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can display fluctuations at the fluctuation time, and the third symbol display device is available. The details of the variation mode of the third symbol to be displayed in 81 are determined. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the third symbol in a variable manner, and the voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the variation display. At the same time as outputting, the lamps of the lamp display devices 227 (illumination units 29 to 33) are turned on and blinked.

As described above, in the main control device 110, only the fluctuation time is determined as the process of determining the fluctuation pattern, and the details of the fluctuation mode according to the fluctuation time are described in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. decide. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and cannot perform complicated processing, but when determining the fluctuation pattern, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time. Compared with the case where the main control device 110 determines the details of the variation mode, the variation pattern determination process of the main control device 110 can be easily performed.

Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main control device 110, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the like, and the command required for the notification is, for example, 3. There is a risk that it will have to be composed of more than bytes, which may complicate sending and receiving commands.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the main control device 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time, if only the information regarding the determined fluctuation time is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the like. Often, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress complicated transmission / reception of commands. Further, even if the main control device 110 determines only the fluctuation time of the symbol variation, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the variation mode according to the designated variation mode from among many variation modes. However, since the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the variation in the determined variation mode, it is possible to give the player a variety of variation effects and improve the interest of the player. be able to.

By the way, in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern table used for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c used at the time of jackpot and the fluctuation pattern table 202c for jackpot are used at the time of deviation. A variation pattern table 202d for deviation is prepared. Further, as the deviation pattern table 202d, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern is set according to whether the gaming state is a time-saving state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, or a low-probability state at normal time excluding the time-saving state. A table 202d2 and a variation pattern table 202d1 for deviation (normal) are prepared.

Here, the details of various fluctuation patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (c) to 8 (e). First, FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into a common 15R jackpot that is referred to when the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, and a 2R probability variation jackpot that is referenced when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is the jackpot random number value at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area is selected. Accordingly, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is determined from the jackpot fluctuation table 202c.

Common to the 15R jackpot, the fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, a fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and a fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. The correspondence between the fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10, the fluctuation B is 11 to 99, and the fluctuation C is 100 to 198.

When the variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the mode of normal reach under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. When variation B (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the mode of super reach by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, or the variation effect is performed by the pseudo-ream. Will be. Further, when the variation C (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the mode of special reach by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, or the variation effect by the pseudo-ream. Is done.

Noor reach is a reach with a short variation time, and is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called bitter stop and the symbols are aligned). The super reach is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned (for example, a long reach or a reach that develops from the normal reach) after a reach with a variation time longer than that of the normal reach. In addition, the special reach is a special in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach of the fluctuation time longer than the super reach (for example, the reach further developed after the super reach and the development destination from the normal reach are different from the super reach. Reach, etc.) Fluctuation pattern.

Since the table common to the 15R jackpot is selected when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is selected, it is easy to select various special reach in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that normal reach and super reach are also selected, it is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any reach.

As for the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach executed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, a large number of different production contents are prepared even if the fluctuation time is the same. For example, in addition to the normal reach in which no character is displayed, a reach in which a predetermined character is displayed is prepared when two symbols on the effective line L1 become the same symbol and are in the reach state or at other timings. ing. In addition, various characters are prepared to be displayed in this case. In addition, there are multiple reach with different production contents, such as a reach that changes the back image quickly and displays it, a reach that adds a notice effect before the start of fluctuation, and a reach that adds a production that becomes a big hit by re-variation. ing. As a result, various variable effects can be performed, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation B or the variation C is determined as the variation pattern, not only the reach but also the variation effect by the pseudo-ream can be executed by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. With the pseudo-ren, the player's interest is further enhanced.

The variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot is only the 2R variation with a variation time of 59 seconds, and the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198. That is, when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R variation (59 seconds) is determined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

When 2R fluctuation (59 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, one mode is selected from a plurality of prepared fluctuation modes dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. , The variable effect is performed in the selected mode. As a variation mode dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot, for example, a variation mode in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol together with the character of "chicken", or a "girl" that does not normally appear. Along with the character, a variation mode in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol is included.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, another fluctuation type counter for finely adjusting the fluctuation time in about ± several seconds may be provided, and whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or reach effect before or during the change effect. It may be determined by another variable type counter.

FIG. 8D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8 (d), the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach other than is determined and the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. It is attached.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area at the start of the fluctuation is not a value that becomes a big hit (big hit random number value), that is, a value that is out of the range, the gaming state excludes the time saving state. When the probability is low during normal operation, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is generated according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. , Determined from the (normal) variation pattern for off.

For complete deviation only, the fluctuation patterns are fluctuation D, in which the fluctuation ends in a short time of 7 seconds and the reach is not established, and fluctuation E, which is 10 seconds and the fluctuation time is longer than the fluctuation D but the reach is not established. The time is as long as 55 seconds, and there is a fluctuation F in which the pseudo-variation by the pseudo-ream is performed 5 times in one fluctuation, and finally the reach is not established and the variation is completely out. As for the correspondence between, the variation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 98, the variation E (10 seconds) is 99 to 148, and the variation F (55 seconds) is 149 to 198. Further, in common reach, there are the above-mentioned fluctuation A (30 seconds), fluctuation B (60 seconds) and fluctuation C (90 seconds) as fluctuation patterns, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is fluctuation A. (30 seconds) is 0 to 98, fluctuation B (60 seconds) is 99 to 190, and fluctuation C (90 seconds) is 191 to 198.

FIG. 8E is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8 (e), the disengagement (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, as in the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. It is divided into a complete detachment only and a common reach that is referred to when a reach other than the front and rear detachment reach and a reach other than the front and rear detachment are determined as the stop type at the time of disconnection.

Then, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern selected in each group for each of the divided groups. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern selected when the complete deviation only is referred to does not include the fluctuation F (55 seconds), and only the fluctuation D (7 seconds) and the fluctuation E (10 seconds) are selected. Further, the variation patterns selected when the reach common is referred to include variation A (30 seconds), variation B (60 seconds), and variation C (90 seconds), as in the deviation pattern table 202d1. ).

When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of the range, and the game state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the execution is performed. The variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is determined from the deviation pattern table 202d2 according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area. Will be done.

In this deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2, the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for variation D (7 seconds) and 191 to 198 for variation E (10 seconds). It has become. Further, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to the reach is 0 to 98 for the variation A (30 seconds), 99 to 190 for the variation B, and 191 to 198 for various out-of-order special reach.

Since the deviation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probabilistic change, it is considered that the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. Become. Therefore, when a fluctuation F with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is performed or a fluctuation E with a relatively long fluctuation time is performed frequently even though it is completely out of alignment, the following is performed when the time is shortened or the probability is high. It takes time to start the variable display, which may give the player a waiting state and cause discomfort to the player. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is lowered, which is not preferable. Therefore, in the case of complete deviation, when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the fluctuation F is not selected, and the gaming state is more variable than when it is in the normal state excluding the time saving state. By configuring the variation D having a shorter variation time than E to be easily selected and starting the next variation display at an early stage, the possibility of causing discomfort to the player can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operating rate.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination and selected (presence or absence of a notice display or the like is selected). In addition, when the reach is established at the time of disengagement, the number of symbols to be stopped by shifting the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped at the end (for example, one symbol deviated from the front and back, etc.) is determined by another variable type counter. May be determined by.

Further, the selection of the deviation type is divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, but even if the game state is normal, there are a plurality of reserved balls. In the case of (for example, if the maximum number is 4, the variation display may be terminated at an early stage), the variation display may be selected by referring to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. It may be configured to prepare a fluctuation pattern table for normal use or probability variation corresponding to the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the variation pattern tables for deviations shown in FIGS. 8 (d) and 8 (e), variation D and variation E are simply regarded as deviations, and when the deviations are selected, the other tables are referred to. , Fluctuation D and variation E may be configured to be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 7, various counters will be described. As described above, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, for example, after being added one by one in the range of 0 to 250 and reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). It is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0. In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and then returns to the initial value at the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used. Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. Obtained when it is done.

The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that the player has won, and the second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "○" as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 16). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, in addition to the counter buffer 203b for storing the various counters shown in FIG. 7 and the holding ball storage area 203c. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 22) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 21) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 20) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a. The hold ball number counter 203a holds the fluctuation display (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) up to 4 times. The initial value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See S1403 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variation display based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (starting winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 17).

The value of the hold ball number counter 203a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 19). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the ball is entered into the first ball entry port 64 and the hold ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 is the value of the reserved ball number itself of the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has happened, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is a first accessory, an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227. It controls the driving of the 87 and the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 includes an MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit that controls the entire voice lamp control device 113, and a sound output LSI 301 that generates a sound to be reproduced and drives the voice output device 226 to output the generated sound. have. The MPU 221 has a program ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory and the like.

Here, the details of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a hold ball number counter 223a, a detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b, a time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c, a start winning counter 223d, a frame button operation effect flag 223e, a frame button operation count counter 223f, a pointer 223g, a timer counter 223h, and progress. It has at least a sound sounding flag 223j and a pitch information memory 223k.

The reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the reserved ball number counter 223a manages the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the number of reserved balls for variable effect is added by entering the first ball entry port 64, and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after addition of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, hold in the main control device 110). The number of reserved balls in the variable effect) is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a (see S2007 in FIG. 25).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is accompanied by the reception. When the mode of variable display on the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is subtracted by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 26). In this way, since the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. ..

The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the reserved ball number counter 223a, or stores the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of, the display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a after storage or updating.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see S2951 in FIG. 41). As described above, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the hold counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is a counter for determining a variation mode (detailed variation pattern) of the variation effect to be started from now on based on the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, and is a counter for the program ROM 222. It is used in combination with the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a (see FIG. 6) provided in. Here, the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a will be described in accordance with the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b.

In the present embodiment, as a detailed variation pattern determined when variation A (variation time 30 seconds) is instructed by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, no character is displayed during the variation time of 30 seconds. In addition to the normal normal reach, a plurality of normal reach in which a predetermined character is displayed while fluctuating are prepared.

As a detailed pattern determined when the fluctuation B (variation time 60 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during the fluctuation time of 60 seconds, the rear image is rapidly changed and displayed, and the like. In addition to preparing a plurality of super reaches, a plurality of pseudo-reams in which pseudo-variations are executed a plurality of times during a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are prepared.

As a detailed pattern determined when the fluctuation C (variation time 90 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during the fluctuation time of 90 seconds, the rear image is rapidly changed and displayed, and the like. In addition to preparing a plurality of special reach to be performed, a plurality of pseudo-reams in which the pseudo-variation is executed a plurality of times during a fluctuation time of 90 seconds are prepared.

As a detailed variation pattern determined when the 2R variation (variation time 59 seconds) is instructed, a plurality of variation modes dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot with a variation time of 59 seconds are prepared.

Further, for each variation pattern (variation A to variation F, 2R variation), different detailed variation patterns are prepared depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal state, a time reduction, or a probability variation state.

The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a are prepared for the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110. It is used to determine one detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed for the variation pattern command from a plurality of detailed variation patterns.

The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is composed of a loop counter, and its update is periodically performed (in the present embodiment, in the process of S1912 executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 24)). .. The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is updated by adding 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this embodiment), reaching the maximum value (99), and then returning to 0. Further, the initial value "0" is set in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 23) executed at the time of power-up.

In the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a, various detailed variations are prepared for each variation pattern (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) notified from the main control device 110. The value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is determined in association with the fluctuation pattern. Further, the correspondence between the detailed fluctuation pattern and the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b depends on the gaming state (whether the normal state, the probable change state, or the time saving state) of the pachinko machine 10 on which the fluctuation effect is performed. Further, the symbols to be confirmed and displayed in the variation effect are associated with each variation pattern (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) separately depending on whether the symbol is "big hit" or "missing".

When the MPU 221 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 reads the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b at that time from the RAM 223. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state and it is determined to be a big hit from the variation type notified by the received stop type command, the gaming state is relative to the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. Is "normal state" and the stop type is "big hit", the detailed variation pattern associated with the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is specified from the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a. .. If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state and it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is out of the variation type notified by the received stop type command, the gaming state is set against the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. Is "time saving state" and the stop type is "off", the detailed variation pattern associated with the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is specified from the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a. ..

The MPU 221 controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 based on the determined detailed variation pattern, and displays the determined detailed variation pattern for the display control device 114 by the display variation pattern command. Notice. Then, the display control device 114 controls the variation display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the detailed variation pattern notified by the display variation pattern command. As a result, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third symbol display device 81 perform a variation effect according to the determined detailed variation pattern.

When the fluctuation D (variation time 7 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the detailed fluctuation pattern of the mode in which the fluctuation time of 7 seconds is completely deviated after the lapse is the pachinko machine 10. One is prepared for each game state. When the variation E (variation time 10 seconds) is instructed, one variation pattern is prepared for each gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in detail of the embodiment in which the variation time of 10 seconds is completely deviated. Further, when the fluctuation F (variation time 55 seconds) is instructed, the pseudo fluctuation by the pseudo-ream is performed 5 times within the fluctuation time of 55 seconds, and finally the reach is not established and the details are completely deviated. There is one variation pattern. However, the variation F is instructed only when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state, as described above.

Therefore, when either of the fluctuations D and E is instructed by the main control device 110, the MPU 221 is prepared correspondingly according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223a. The detailed variation pattern is determined, and the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled based on the detailed variation pattern, and the detailed variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114 by the display variation pattern command. Further, when the fluctuation F is instructed by the main control device 110, the MPU 221 determines the only detailed fluctuation pattern prepared by the MPU 221 regardless of the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223a, and based on that, the voice. The output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the detailed fluctuation pattern thereof is notified to the display control device 114 by the display fluctuation pattern command.

Here, in the voice lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the stop type indicated by the stop type command received so far (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, front / rear out reach, front / rear out of front / rear). Other than reach, complete deviation), and the number of fluctuations is used for judgment.

For example, when a stop type command corresponding to a certain variation effect indicates a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot as the stop type, the pachinko machine 10 is used from after the jackpot effect after the variation effect until the next jackpot. It is determined that the gaming state is a probable change state. In addition, when a 15R normal jackpot is indicated as the stop type in the stop type command corresponding to a certain variation effect, after the jackpot effect after the variation effect until 100 times of variation effect is performed, or next, the jackpot is performed. Until, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the time saving state. Then, after the fluctuation effect 100 times, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big hit.

The time-saving BGM playback flag 223c is referred to as BGM (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving BGM") used as background music (hereinafter referred to as "BGM (Back Ground Music)") when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state. Is a flag indicating that playback is in progress. When the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223d is on, it indicates that the time-saving BGM is being reproduced as BGM, and when it is off, it indicates that a BGM other than the time-saving BGM is being reproduced as BGM.

The time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to off as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Then, when the reproduction of the time-saving BGM is started by the control of the MPU 221, the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to ON (S2148 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, when the reproduction of the time saving BGM is stopped by the MPU 221, the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to off (S2149 in FIG. 28).

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state and a ball entering (starting winning) into the first ball entry port 64 is detected, the player is notified that the ball has been entered. The incoming ball sound is output from the voice output device 226. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the output of the incoming ball sound is output in accordance with the rhythm (beat) of the time-saving BGM.

Specifically, when the MPU221 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110 when the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on, it determines that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, and for the time being Stock that information. Further, the MPU 221 manages the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM sounded from the voice output device 226. Then, at the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM or the timing of the middle (back beat) between the beats, the incoming ball sound corresponding to the stocked incoming ball is pronounced from the voice output device 226.

As a result, the incoming ball sound is pronounced in accordance with the beat of the time-saving BGM, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically according to the rhythm of the time-saving BGM, the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Further, the MPU 221 is stocked not only at the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM but also at the timing of the back beat (middle of the beat) when the balls are continuously entered into the first input port 64. The input sound corresponding to the input ball is pronounced from the voice output device 226. As a result, a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the incoming ball sound, so that the player can be further entertained.

Further, when the MPU221 pronounces the incoming ball sound, the MPU221 determines the pitch of the incoming ball sound based on the chord (chord) of the time-saving BGM at the sounding timing. Specifically, as the pitch of the incoming ball, one is selected from the pitches of the constituent notes constituting the chord. For example, if the chord of the time-saving BGM at the sounding timing of the incoming ball is "C", the pitch of the incoming ball sound is set to one of the constituent sounds "do", "mi", and "so" of the chord. Select.

As a result, not only the incoming ball sound is pronounced according to the beat of the time-saving BGM, but also the pitch is sounded according to the chord of the time-saving BGM at that time. Therefore, since the chord is composed of the incoming ball sound and the time-saving BGM, the player can hear a more pleasant voice. Further, when the ball continues to enter the first ball entry port 64, a melody accompanied by a time-saving BGM can be composed by the ball entry sound and can be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the number of entering balls. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the incoming ball sound from time to time.

Further, when the MPU221 sounds the incoming ball sound corresponding to the incoming ball stocked in the same chord in the time saving BGM three times in a row, the first incoming sound and the third incoming sound are different. , The pitch is selected from the constituent sounds, and the second incoming sound is the transitional sound that connects the first constituent sound and the third constituent sound in a musical scale. For example, if the chord of the BGM for shortening the time when the incoming ball is sounded three times in a row is "C", the pitch of the first incoming sound is set as the constituent sound "do" and the third incoming sound is input. The pitch of the ball sound is defined as the constituent sound "mi", while the pitch of the second incoming ball sound is defined as the elapsed sound "re". As a result, the three incoming notes are pronounced in the order of "do", "re", and "mi" while matching the beat of the BGM of the chord "C", so that the width of the melody played by the incoming notes is widened. spread. That is, while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM, the incoming sound is produced while inserting the incoming sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch between the incoming sound having the constituent sound of the BGM chord as the pitch. As a result, it is possible to give variation to the melody by the incoming ball sound accompanied by the time-saving BGM. Therefore, the melody due to the incoming ball sound does not become monotonous, and it is possible to output a voice that does not make the player bored.

The start winning counter 223d is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the first entry port 64, that is, the number of start winnings. When the MPU 221 receives a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the start winning counter 223d to add 1 to the first ball entry port. Stock the ball entering 64 (S2010 in FIG. 25).

Then, when the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on and the time saving BGM is being reproduced as the BGM, if the start winning counter 223d is a value of 1 or more at the timing of the beat of the time saving BGM, that is, that is, If the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is stocked, the ball entering sound having one of the constituent sounds of the time-saving BGM chord at that time is pronounced at the timing of the beat (Fig.). 29). As a result, the entry sound indicating the entry into the first entry port 64 can be pronounced in accordance with the beat and chord of the time-saving BGM, so that the player can hear a rhythmic and pleasant voice. Can be done.

Further, when the value of the start winning counter 223d is 2 or more at the timing of the back beat of the time-saving BGM and the incoming ball sound is produced in the previous beat, the code of the time-saving BGM at the timing of the back beat. On the condition that the chord of the BGM for shortening the time at the timing of the next beat is the same as the chord, the incoming sound with the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch is produced (see FIG. 30). As a result, when the ball continues to enter the first ball entry port 64, the ball entry sound is produced using the timing of the back beat of the time-saving BGM, so that a complicated rhythm can be created by the ball entry sound. can. In addition, at the timing of the previous and next beats, the incoming note is pronounced with the constituent notes of the chord as the pitch, while the incoming note pronounced at the timing of the back beat has the elapsed note of the chord as the pitch. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to give variation to the melody by the incoming ball sound.

The start winning counter 223d is subtracted by 1 when the winning sound is sounded (S2167 in FIG. 29, S2179 in FIG. 30). Further, the start winning counter 223d is initialized to 0 when the reproduction of the time-saving BGM is started as the BGM (S2148 in FIG. 28). Therefore, the ball that has entered the first entry port 64 during the reproduction of the time-saving BGM can be stocked by using the start winning counter 223d.

Further, when the value of the start winning counter 223d becomes 3, even if there is a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (even if a hold ball number command is received), the ball entry is not counted. (S2009 in FIG. 25). That is, no more than three balls are stocked in the first ball slot 64.

In this pachinko machine 10, since the incoming ball sound is pronounced in accordance with the beat (or back beat) of the time-saving BGM, when many incoming balls to the first incoming ball opening 64 are stocked, they are finally stocked. The pronunciation of the incoming ball for the incoming ball will be delayed significantly from the actual incoming ball, and the difference between the actual incoming ball and the pronunciation timing of the incoming ball will be noticeable, which will make the player feel uncomfortable. This is because there is a risk of hugging them. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, by limiting the stock of balls entering the first ball entry port 64 to three balls, it is possible to prevent a significant difference between the actual ball entry and the sounding timing of the entry sound. can.

Further, if the tempo of the time-saving BGM (the number of beats in one minute) is, for example, 160 BPM (Beats Per Unite), the firing of balls is less than 100 balls per minute, so the time of one beat. It can be said that there is almost no stock of more than 3 balls entering the first winning opening 64. Therefore, even if the entry to the first entry port 64 is restricted so as not to stock more than three, the entry to the first entry opening 64 in which the entry sound is not pronounced may realistically occur. However, the fact that the incoming ball sound is not pronounced does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

The upper limit of the number of stocks may be changed according to the tempo of the time-saving BGM, assuming that the number of balls fired within a predetermined time is constant. For example, when the tempo of the time-saving BGM is 100 BPM, the number of beats in one minute is smaller than that when the tempo is 160 BPM, so that the timing at which the incoming ball sound is produced is also reduced. Therefore, the number of incoming balls to be stocked may be set to, for example, 4. As a result, it is possible to make the incoming ball sound for more incoming balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of stocks is determined for the entry into the first entry port 64, and the entry sound is sounded, but the upper limit of the number of stocks may not be set. good. In this case, as described above, when a large number of balls entering the first ball entry port 64 are stocked, the pronunciation of the ball entry sound for the last stocked ball is significantly delayed from the actual ball entry. However, the melody played by this delayed incoming sound allows the player to immerse himself in the aftermath of the incoming ball.

The frame button operation effect flag 223e is a flag indicating that an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. The effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is, for example, that the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a predetermined character, so that the effect may be a big hit in the variable effect. When developing from normal reach to super reach, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the selection screen of the super reach effect mode during normal reach, and the player is allowed to select the super reach effect mode. It includes directing.

The frame button operation flag 223e indicates that an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is performed when it is on, and an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is performed when it is off. Indicates that there is no such thing.

The frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to off as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power supply is turned on. Then, when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is started during the variable effect, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to ON (S2139 in FIG. 28). Further, when the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is completed, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to off (S2141 in FIG. 29).

In the present embodiment, when an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, the operation of notifying that the frame button 22 has been operated is notified. Sound is output from the audio output device 226. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the output of this operation sound is output in accordance with the rhythm (beat) of the BGM.

Specifically, the MPU 221 executes the frame button operation sound output process (S2137 in FIG. 27) when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is on, and inputs a signal indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated. Then, the information is stocked for the time being. Further, the MPU 221 manages the timing of the beat of the BGM sounded from the voice output device 226. Then, at the timing of the beat of the BGM or the timing of the middle (back beat) between the beats, the operation sound corresponding to the stocked operation is pronounced from the voice output device 226.

As a result, the operation sound is pronounced in accordance with the beat of the BGM, so that the sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game while rhythmically operating the frame button 22 according to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Further, when the player operates the frame button 22 continuously, the MPU 221 produces an operation sound corresponding to the stocked operation not only at the BGM beat timing but also at the back beat timing from the voice output device 226. Pronounce. As a result, a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the operation sound, so that the player can further enjoy the operation of the frame button 22.

Further, the MPU 221 determines the pitch of the operation sound based on the BGM chord (chord) at the sound generation timing when the operation sound is sounded in the same manner as the sound of the incoming ball sound during the time-saving BGM reproduction. do. As a result, the operation sound and the BGM form a chord while matching the rhythm, so that the player can hear a more pleasant voice. Further, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player continues, a melody accompanied by BGM can be composed by the operation sound and can be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of the operation and the number of operations. Therefore, in order to listen to various melody played by the operation sound from time to time, the player is struck by the desire to operate the frame button 22 with various rhythms. Therefore, it is possible to give the player more enjoyment of the game.

Further, the MPU 221 is the first operation when the operation sound corresponding to the operation stocked in the same chord in the BGM is sounded three times in a row, similar to the sound of the incoming ball sound during the time-saving BGM reproduction. For the sound and the third operation sound, the pitch is selected from the constituent sounds, and for the second operation sound, the elapsed sound that connects the first constituent sound and the third constituent sound in a musical scale is selected.

As a result, the operation sound is produced by inserting the operation sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch between the operation sounds whose pitch is the constituent sound of the BGM chord while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM. It is possible to give variation to the melody by the operation sound accompanied by BGM. Therefore, the melody due to the operation sound does not become monotonous, and it is possible to output a voice that does not make the player bored.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is not performed while the time saving BGM is being played. That is, during the period during which the entry sound indicating entry into the first entry opening 64 is produced, the operation sound indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is not produced.

The frame button operation number counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated by the player. When a signal indicating that the MPU 221 has been operated is input from the frame button 22, the frame button operation count counter 223f is set to the frame button operation count counter 223f in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1907 in FIG. 24) executed in the main processing. 1 is added, and the operation to the frame button 22 is stocked.

Then, when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is on and an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the frame button operation on output is performed. If the process is executed (S2137 in FIG. 27) and the frame button operation count counter 223f has a value of 1 or more at the timing of the BGM beat, that is, if the operation to the frame button 22 is stocked, that beat At the timing, a process of producing an operation sound having one of the constituent sounds of the BGM chord at that time as the pitch is performed. As a result, the operation sound indicating the operation of the frame button 22 can be pronounced in accordance with the beat and chord of the BGM, and the player can hear a rhythmic and pleasant voice.

Further, when the value of the frame button operation count counter 223f is 2 or more at the timing of the back beat of BGM and the operation sound is pronounced in the previous beat, the BGM code at the timing of the back beat and the next On condition that the chord of the BGM at the timing of the beat is the same as the chord, the process of pronouncing the operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is performed. As a result, when the operation to the frame button 22 continues, the operation sound is produced using the timing of the back beat of the BGM, so that a complicated rhythm can be engraved by the operation sound. Also, at the timing of the previous and next beats, the operation sound is pronounced with the constituent notes of the chord as the pitch, whereas the operation sound pronounced at the timing of the back beat has the elapsed note of the chord as the pitch. As described above, it is possible to give variation to the melody by the operation sound.

The frame button operation count counter 223f is decremented by 1 when the operation sound is sounded. Further, the frame button operation count counter 223f is initialized to 0 when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is turned on (S2139 in FIG. 28). Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the effect requiring the operation of the frame button is being performed, the operation can be stocked by the frame button operation number counter 223f.

Further, when the value of the frame button operation count counter 223f is 3, even if there is an operation on the frame button 22, the operation is not counted. That is, the operation to the frame button 22 is not stocked more than three.

In this pachinko machine 10, since the operation sound is pronounced according to the beat (or back beat) of the BGM, when the operations to many frame buttons 22 are stocked, the operation sound for the last stocked operation is pronounced. This is because the operation is performed with a large delay from the actual operation, and the difference between the actual operation and the sounding timing of the operation sound becomes remarkable, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, by limiting the stock of operations to the frame button 22 to three, it is possible to suppress that the actual operation and the sounding timing of the operation sound are significantly different from each other.

An operation detection invalid period may be provided for the operation of the frame button 22. That is, when the operation of the frame button 22 is detected, even if the frame button 22 is operated for a certain period (for example, 0.2 seconds) thereafter, the operation may be invalidated. As a result, even though the frame button 22 is operated once, it is detected that the frame button 22 is operated based on the vibration caused by the operation, and the operation is recognized as different from the operation intended by the player. Can be suppressed. When this operation detection invalid period is provided, for example, when the operation detection invalid period of 0.2 seconds is provided, even if the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit, the operation of the frame button 22 is performed for at least 0.2 seconds. Is invalidated, so that if the tempo of the BGM is 160 BPM (the cycle of one beat is 375 milliseconds), the number of operations of the frame button 22 stocked during one beat is at most two. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to set an upper limit of the stock especially for the number of operations of the frame button 22.

Further, the operation detection invalid period may be set according to the tempo of the BGM. For example, when the tempo of BGM is 120 BPM (cycle of one beat is 500 milliseconds), the operation detection invalid period is set to 0.25 seconds, and the tempo of BGM is 150 BPM (cycle of one beat is 400 milliseconds). ), The operation detection invalid period may be set to 0.2 seconds. As a result, the number of operations of the frame button 22 stocked during one beat is at most two, so that the operation sound is pronounced using the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat even if the upper limit of the stock is not set. By doing so, when the frame button 22 is operated, the operation sound can be sounded without delay.

The pointer 223g is for designating an address in which various control information to be acquired at a certain time is specified from a data table in which various control information to be executed in the voice lamp control device 113 is specified in chronological order. The data table is prepared for each effect whose execution is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, and the data table corresponding to all the effects is stored in the data table storage area 222b (see FIG. 6) provided in the program ROM 222. Will be done.

When the MPU 221 determines an effect to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command received from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 reads the data table corresponding to the determined effect from the data table storage area 222b. According to the read data table, the MPU 221 outputs audio from the audio output device 226, lights / blinks the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation). (Drive of motor 87e) is controlled.

Each address in the data table defines, in order from the address "0001H", control information to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 at the time indicated by the address. That is, when the reproduction of the predetermined voice is started or stopped in the first time, the information instructing the start or stop of the predetermined voice is defined in association with the address corresponding to the first time. .. When the predetermined lamp is turned on in the second time, the information instructing the lighting of the predetermined lamp is defined in association with the address corresponding to the second time. In the third time, when the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven and the first accessory 87 is lowered by a predetermined step, the first accessory 87 is associated with the address corresponding to the third time. Information for driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is specified so as to lower the accessory 87 by a predetermined step.

The pointer 223g is initialized to 0 once the effect to be executed is determined by the MPU221 and the use of the data table corresponding to the effect is determined (S2147 in FIG. 27). Then, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the pointer 223g before reading the control information from the data table, and reads the control information corresponding to the address indicated by the pointer 223g after the addition in the data table. Then, according to the contents instructed by the control information, the voice output from the voice output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory). (Drive of rotary motor 87e) is controlled.

Here, after the MPU 221 determines the effect to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113, when the data table corresponding to the effect is newly read, the reading is started at the timing of the beat of the BGM (). S2123 in FIG. 27). Further, when the pointer 223g is counted up (1 is added) and the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g is read from the data table, it is also performed at the timing of the beat of the BGM. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 starts or stops the voice output from the voice output device 226, lights / blinks the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory). (1) Driving of the accessory rotation motor 87e) can be started at the timing of the beat of the BGM.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the voice output, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the operation timing of the first accessory 87 when one notification is performed by the first accessory 87 will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the first accessory 87. As shown in FIG. 10, when one notification is made by the first accessory 87, the first accessory 87 stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86 descends by 80 steps in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Start. Then, when the descent of the first accessory 87 is stopped in accordance with the beat of the BGM, the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 is performed a plurality of times with a width of 20 steps. At this time, the ascending / descending stop / start of the first accessory 87 is also performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Then, the first accessory 87 is finally lowered to the maximum point position in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and the rotation of the first accessory 87 is started at the maximum point position also in accordance with the beat of the BGM.

In this way, when the MPU 221 newly reads the data table corresponding to the effect after the voice lamp control device 113 determines the effect to be executed, the MPU221 starts the reading at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and also Since the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g is also read from the data table at the timing of the beat of the BGM, as shown in FIG. 10, for example, one notification of the first accessory 87 is made by the BGM. It can be operated according to the beat of. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 11, the effect execution timing of the variable effect will be described. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the effect execution timing when the detailed variation pattern is a pseudo-ream as an example of the variation effect.

The start of the variation effect is based on the timing of the ball entering the first entry port 64 when the entry into the first entry opening 64 is not suspended, and the start of the variation effect to the first entry opening 64. When the ball is suspended, it is determined based on the end timing of the variable effect or the jackpot effect that has been performed until immediately before, and cannot be matched with the timing of the BGM beat.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol to vibrate up and down from the timing of the original fluctuation start to the timing of the beat of the BGM (symbol shaking period). Then, when the timing of the first BGM beat arrives from the original fluctuation start timing, the reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern determined for the fluctuation effect is started at that timing, and also. , The third symbol display device 81 starts high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol.

A display pattern is set in advance so that the display of various effect images during the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Further, the output from the audio output device 226 and the lighting / blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 according to the display of the effect image are specified in the data table, and as described above, these are also specified in the BGM. It is done in time with the beat. For example, in the variation effect by the pseudo-ream shown in FIG. 11, the chance-up image showing that the variation effect is pseudo-stopped and the re-variation is performed again is output in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Along with this, the audio output corresponding to the chance-up image and the lighting / blinking of the lamp are also performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM.

Further, in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM shortly before the original definite display is performed, and the stop display is performed. The stop sound to be represented is produced by the voice output device 226. After that, the third symbol display device 81 vibrates the third symbol up and down until the original confirmed display timing is reached (symbol shaking period), and the third symbol is confirmed and displayed at the original confirmed display timing.

As described above, the fluctuation effect is originally started and definitely displayed regardless of the beat of the BGM, but in the present embodiment, high-speed fluctuation is started in accordance with the timing of the beat, and once. Display the stop. Then, from the original fluctuation start timing to the start of high-speed fluctuation, and from the time when the stop display is performed to the original confirmed display timing, the display that vibrates the third symbol up and down is displayed as the symbol shaking period. conduct. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is started in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and the player can be shown as if the stop display was performed. In addition, various effect images displayed during the variation effect can be displayed according to the beat of the BGM, and the sound output according to the variation effect and the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227 can also be performed by the BGM. It can be done in time with the beat. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling that the variable effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation will be continued. The timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the beat cycle of the BGM. The MPU 221 uses the timer counter 223h to determine the timing of the beat and the back beat of the BGM being reproduced. The timer counter 223h is initialized to 1 when the BGM reproduced by the audio output device 113 is changed and the reproduction of the changed BGM is started (S2146 of S28). At this time, the MPU 221 reads the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced (the number of beats in one minute) from the ROM 222, and calculates the beat cycle T (milliseconds) from the tempo. The beat period T (milliseconds) is calculated by calculating 6000 milliseconds / (BGM tempo).

The tempo of the BGM is predetermined in the ROM 222 for all the BGMs reproduced by the voice lamp control device 113. Here, the tempo of each BGM is predetermined so that the period T of the beat is a multiple of 2 milliseconds. As a result, as will be described later, the timing of the BGM beat and the timing of the back beat can be easily determined only by performing the process of adding 1 to the timer counter 223h every 1 millisecond.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the tempo of the BGM is specified in ROM 222 in advance for all the BGMs reproduced by the voice lamp control device 113 will be described, but the BGMs for all the BGMs will be described. The beat cycle T may be specified in ROM 222 in advance. In this case, the beat period T of each BGM specified in ROM 222 may be determined to be a multiple of 2 milliseconds.

After that, the timer counter 223h is incremented by 1 in the sound editing / output processing executed every 1 millisecond. However, when the value of the timer counter 223h matches the beat cycle T, "1" is set instead of adding 1. As a result, the timer counter 223h counts the beat cycle of the BGM.

When the value of the timer counter 223h is T, the MPU 221 reads the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the set data table as the timing of the beat of the BGM, and reads the control information from the audio output device 226. Sound output, lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first accessory 87 (driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e). As a result, the voice output, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed according to the rhythm of the BGM.

Further, when the time-saving BGM is being played as the BGM, if there is a prize in the first entry port 64, the prize is dealt with at the timing when the value of the timer counter 223h becomes T or T / 2. Controls the sound of the winning sound. When an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, when the frame button 22 is operated, the operation is performed at the timing when the value of the timer counter 223h becomes T or T / 2. Controls the sound of the corresponding operation sound. Therefore, since the entry sound and the operation sound are produced at the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat, the player can hear the entry sound and the operation sound that match the rhythm of the BGM.

The elapsed sound pronunciation flag 223j is a flag indicating that an incoming note or an operation sound having the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch is produced in the back beat of the BGM, and when it is on, the elapsed sound is defined as the pitch. Indicates that the incoming sound or operation sound has been produced, and when it is off, it indicates that the incoming sound or operation sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch has not been produced.

The elapsed sound sounding flag 223j is set to off as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on.

In the MPU 221, when the timing of the back beat is reached, the number of balls entering the first ball opening 64 or the number of times the frame button 22 is operated, in which the ball entry sound or the operation sound is produced and stocked at the immediately preceding beat, is determined. If it is 2 or more, it is determined whether or not the BGM chord in the immediately preceding beat matches the BGM chord in the immediately following beat. The progress of the chord is stored in the program ROM 222 in advance for all BGMs, and the MPU 221 can grasp the chord of the beat of the BGM according to the progress of the reproduction of the BGM.

Then, in this case, if it is determined that the BGM chord in the immediately preceding beat matches the BGM chord in the immediately following beat, the MPU221 sets the elapsed note of the chord as the pitch at the timing of the back beat. Sounds a ball sound or an operation sound, and sets the elapsed sound sounding flag 223j to ON. Here, when the incoming sound or the operation sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch is produced in the back beat, as described above, at least two or more incoming balls or the number of operations are stocked, so that even in the immediately preceding beat. , It will always produce a ball entry sound or an operation sound.

The MPU221 refers to the elapsed sound sounding flag 223j when sounding the incoming ball sound or the operating sound in the beat immediately after this. Then, when the elapsed sound sounding flag 223j is on, the incoming ball sound or the operation sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch is produced at the timing of the back beat, and therefore, at the timing of the beat immediately after that, the sounded elapsed sound is produced. Produces an incoming ball sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the constituent sound corresponding to the sound. As a result, when an entry sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the constituent sound is produced in the immediately preceding beat following the elapsed sound of the back beat, the pitch deviated from the elapsed sound produced in the back beat is produced. It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a strange melody when the incoming sound or the operation sound is produced while inserting the elapsed sound.

The pitch information memory 223k is a memory for storing the pronounced pitch when the incoming sound or the operation sound is pronounced at the timing of the beat of the BGM. When the MPU221 determines the pronunciation of the incoming ball sound or the operation sound at the timing of the beat of the BGM, the pitch is stored in the pitch information memory 223k (S2166 in FIG. 29).

Here, after a certain BGM beat produces an incoming note or an operation note whose pitch is the constituent note of the chord, the incoming note whose pitch is the elapsed note of the same chord at the timing of the subsequent back beat of the BGM. Alternatively, when an operation sound is produced and then a ball-in sound or an operation sound having the same chord constituent sound as the pitch is produced at the timing of the next BGM beat, the pachinko machine 10 uses the back beat. The pitch of the note and the constituent notes in the next beat is determined based on the pitch of the constituent notes in the first beat. The correspondence between the pitch of the constituent notes in the first beat, the elapsed notes in the back beat, and the pitches of the constituent notes in the next beat is provided in the program 222 for each chord that can be taken by BGM. It is defined by the pitch setting table 222c (see FIG. 6) during sound reproduction.

For example, in the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c, the chord "C" is associated with the constituent sound "do" in the first beat, and the elapsed sound in the back beat is "re", and the next beat. "Mi" is specified as the constituent note in, and "Fa" is specified as the elapsed note in the back beat, and "So" is specified as the constituent note in the next beat, in association with the constituent note "Mi" in the first beat. It is specified, and "fa" is specified as the elapsed sound in the back beat, and "mi" is specified as the constituent sound in the next beat, in association with the constituent sound "so" in the first beat. For the chord "D", "mi" is specified as the elapsed sound in the back beat and "fa #" is specified as the constituent sound in the next beat in correspondence with the constituent sound "re" in the first beat. Corresponding to the constituent sound "fa #" in the first beat, "so" is specified as the elapsed sound in the back beat, and "la" is specified as the constituent sound in the next beat, and the constituent sound "la" in the first beat is specified. Corresponding to "la", "so" is specified as the elapsed sound in the back beat, and "fa #" is specified as the constituent sound in the next beat. In addition, for the chord "F", "so" is specified as the elapsed sound in the back beat and "la" is specified as the constituent sound in the next beat in association with the constituent sound "fa" in the first beat. , The constituent note "la" in the first beat is associated with "shi" as the elapsed note in the back beat, and "do" is specified as the constituent note in the next beat, and the constituent note "do" in the first beat. Corresponding to "do", "shi" is specified as the elapsed sound in the back beat, and "la" is specified as the constituent sound in the next beat.

In the MPU221, for example, when the chord at the beat of a certain BGM is "C" and the pitching sound or operation sound having the constituent sound "mi" as the pitch is produced, the pitch "mi" is produced. Is stored in the pitch information memory 223k. When the incoming ball sound or operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord "C" is produced at the timing of the back beat of the subsequent BGM, the incoming ball sound or operation sound produced in the immediately preceding beat from the pitch information memory 223k. ("Mi" in this example), and in the code "C", the pitch of the elapsed sound corresponding to the constituent sound "Mi" is specified from the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c. In this example, "fa" is specified as the pitch of the elapsed sound, and an incoming sound or an operation sound having the elapsed sound "fa" as the pitch is produced at the timing of the back beat.

Further, when the incoming ball sound or the operation sound having the constituent sound of the chord "C" as the pitch is produced at the timing of the next BGM beat following the back beat (that is, the elapsed sound sounding flag 223j is turned on). Case), the pitch of the incoming ball sound or the operation sound pronounced in the immediately preceding beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (“mi” in this example), and the chord “C” corresponds to the constituent sound “mi”. The pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat is specified from the pitch setting table 222c during playback of the elapsed sound. In this example, "so" is specified as the pitch of the constituent sound in the next beat, and the incoming sound or the operation sound having the constituent sound "so" as the pitch is produced at the timing of the next beat.

As a result, in each of the first BGM beat, the following back beat, and the subsequent beat, the entry sound or the operation sound is sounded in the order of "mi", "fa", and "so" corresponding to the BGM chord "C". To. Therefore, when the incoming note or the operation note with the elapsed note as the pitch is produced in the back beat between the beats at which the incoming note or the operation note that pitches the constituent notes of the chord is produced. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a strange pitched transitional note, or the occurrence of a pitch that deviates from the elapsed note pronounced in the backbeat in the beat after the backbeat. Therefore, it is possible to play a beautiful melody when the entry sound or the operation sound is produced while inserting the elapsed sound.

The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and whether or not variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command. Further, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when a stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 25), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 26).

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, a first accessory rotation motor 87b, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like. Each is connected.

The sound output LSI 301 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that is directly connected to the MPU 221, generates a sound to be reproduced based on an instruction from the MPU 221 and outputs the sound generated from the audio output device 226. The audio data ROM 306 is connected to the sound output LSI 301. The voice data ROM 306 is a memory in which various voice data are stored.

When the reproduction start command is set from the MPU 221, the sound output LSI 301 identifies the sound to be reproduced included in the reproduction start command, reads the audio data corresponding to the specified sound from the audio data ROM 306, and reproduces the sound. The sound to be output is generated, and the generated sound is output from the voice output device 226. Further, when the reproduction end command is set from the MPU221, the MPU 221 specifies the sound to be reproduced included in the reproduction end instruction, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 301 has 16 playback channels, and can simultaneously generate up to 16 sounds, combine (mix) them, and then output them from the audio output device 226.

The data format stored in the audio data ROM 306 may be arbitrary. For example, the sound waveform may be in a data format sampled by a linear pulse code fluctuation method, or may be data-compressed by various audio compression methods such as MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding). May be.

Alternatively, a MIDI file compliant with the MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) standard for pronouncing various voices may be stored in the voice data ROM 306. In this case, the sound output LSI 301 includes a MIDI sound module, reads a MIDI file for reproducing the type of sound instructed to start playback from the MPU 221 from the audio data ROM 306, and causes the MIDI sound module to sound according to the read MIDI file. Then, play the sound.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has at least an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. are doing.

The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 issues a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113. Received from 113.

The input / output port 238 is also connected to the MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the pachinko machine 10 has the same specifications as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. Further, the program ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a and an additional data table storage area 232b.

The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which the display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on the command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table describes the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time in the effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 specifies an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and reads out a display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a. Then, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the read display data table.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, a variable effect, a demo effect, and the like. A display data table corresponding to the final display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

The demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The confirmation display effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the fluctuation effect. It is a display effect. For example, if the stop symbol is a missed symbol, an effect of emphasizing the miss is performed, and if the stop symbol is either a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. The production is done. By visually recognizing this definite display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

The restart effect is performed at a predetermined position between the time when the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the time when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. This is an effect of displaying an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) in the center on the third symbol display device 81. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

In the display data table storage area 232a, one display data table corresponding to the demo effect and the restart effect is stored. The variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, is prepared one by one according to the combination of the variation effect pattern and the stop symbol to be set. In addition, as a display data table corresponding to the definite display effect, a definite display of a missed symbol as a stop symbol, a definite display of a probabilistic jackpot (15R probabilistic jackpot or a 2R probabilistic jackpot), and a normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot). ) Is confirmed and displayed respectively.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw sprites, such as values, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character and a character used for various effects such as a person or a character, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is any of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage (either "town center stage", "sea stage", or "mountain stage") selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Information is described that specifies whether to display the image or display a rear image different from the rear images A to C. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. .. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead of this, the back type and which state corresponds to the back type. Display state information indicating whether the rear image should be displayed may be specified. The rear image is displayed with the display range, brightness, hue, etc. changing over time. This display state information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the initial state. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the initial state indicated by the display state information.

Further, the display state information is information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image based on this display data table (or displaying the image based on this display data table on the third symbol display device 81). You may. In this case, the MPU 231 has started drawing an image (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table. Based on the state of the rear image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the display state information. Identify.

Further, the display state information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table), depending on the back type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the third symbol display device 81), and the type information of the display state information (display on the display state information) together with the back type and display state information. For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). Information) indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time from the start of the display) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the display state information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), a unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, each of the third symbols is given a unique identification number for identifying each of them. For example, the main symbol of "0" is given "0" as an identification number, the main symbol of "1" is given an identification number of "1", and the main symbol of "2" is given an identification number of "". 2 ”is attached.

In addition, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly specified, but the variation effect performed immediately before is stopped. Offset information with the identification number of the symbol is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to each third symbol.

The offset information is specified as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. From the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before. Describe the difference (offset information) from the identification information of. As a result, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

It should be noted that, as the symbol type information, the third symbol has a high speed during the predetermined time during which the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the identification number itself of the third symbol to be actually displayed. It is set to be a variable display time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 13). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The selected display data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a, stored in the display data table buffer 233a provided in the work RAM 233, which will be described later, and the pointer 233c is initialized. Then, the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the next is based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233c, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the program to be executed by the MPU 231 is changed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a.

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why the pachinko machine 10 can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. Therefore, as described above. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Returning to FIG. 12, the explanation will be continued. The additional data table storage area 232b is an area for storing an additional data table that defines the display contents of the effect to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with respect to one effect based on the command from the main control device 110. be. In the additional data table storage area 232b, an additional data table is prepared and stored for each effect to be additionally displayed.

Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110, for example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect. The concept of displaying and displaying another effect on top of that one effect, changing the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or changing the image displayed in one effect. It includes.

That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. , The drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of the one effect, and the drawing content required to change and display the image displayed in the one effect are defined. Is.

The details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an additional data table. In the additional data table, the content (drawing content) of one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is specified in detail in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that should be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a semi-transparent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

In the example of FIG. 14, the sprite type (character type: first combination) is associated with one character (character 1: corresponding to an image of a movable accessory) in association with the address "097H" specified in the display data table. Object, deuteragonist, etc.), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, filter designation information are specified. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data is specified (corresponding to the address "0001H" in FIG. 14).

The display contents specified by the additional data table include, for example, the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main control device 110. The display content for displaying the preview effect image, which is additionally displayed, is defined by the additional data table.

Similar to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table ("00FDH" in the example of FIG. 14). ") Contains" End "information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the additional data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 receives a command from the voice lamp control device 113, and when it is determined to additionally display the effect by the received command with respect to the effect for which the display is started earlier, the MPU 231 corresponds to the added effect. The additional data table is read from the additional data table storage area 232b and stored in the additional data table buffer 233b of the work RAM 233 described later.

Then, each time the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. The drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image content to be drawn next.

For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233g becomes "097H", the MPU 231 is specified in the address "097H" of the additional data table in various sprites specified in the address "097H" of the display data table. A sprite of the character 1 is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is "0001H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0001H" of the additional data table, it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address of the display data table "0001H". A drawing list is generated based on various sprites specified in "0001H".

Further, when the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table is "End" information, or when the pointer 233c indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example,). , In the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233c indicates an address after "00FEH"), it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and drawing is performed based on various sprites specified in the display data table. Generate a list.

Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, according to the update of the pointer 233c, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table are used. The specified image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display the display on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. When adding to an effect image (for example, a variable effect image) and displaying another effect image (for example, an image imitating a first character), addition corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed. By setting the data table in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. As a result, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and there are two types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display in which an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image is defined. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x (1 + 2) = 96 types of display data tables must be prepared, but a data table corresponding to other production images such as this pachinko machine 10 is used as an additional data table. By separately specifying, 32 + 2 = 34 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and the capacity increase of ROM 232 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store a data table corresponding to various aspects of the effect within the capacity prepared in the ROM 232, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect image.

Further, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table as in the pachinko machine 10, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a, Even if it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. By simply setting the data table buffer 233b, other effect images to be added and displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233b. While updating the pointer 233c every hour from the table, the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer can be easily specified, and one drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily specified from these. Can be generated in. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effects to be additionally displayed should be displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of effect display from a small number of data tables.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, and a timekeeping counter 233e.

The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233c by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The additional data table buffer 233b is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing the additional data table corresponding to the effect. The MPU 231 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 233a, and temporarily writes Null data in the additional data table buffer 233b, which means that there is no display object to be displayed. Clear the contents.

After that, the MPU 231 is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a based on a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. If the presence or absence is determined and there is an effect to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233b. Store.

Then, the MPU 231 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b and the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a while adding the pointer 233c one by one. Based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 is generated for each frame. .. As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, since the All data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as it is.

The pointer 233c is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing contents should be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in the buffers of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233c to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, in the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, the pointer The update process is executed (see S2905 and FIG. 42 in the figure), and the value of the pointer 233c is added by 1 (see S2981 in FIG. 42).

The MPU 231 has an address indicated by the pointer 233c from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b each time the pointer 233c is updated. The drawing contents specified in the above are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect is displayed. The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. .. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

The drawing list area 233d is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 15, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes an address in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the image controller 237 describes a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area specified by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 is a character. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semi-transparency according to the semi-transparent value. Processing was performed, synthesis processing with other sprites was performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing was performed according to the color information, and filtering processing was performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Above, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 describes the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c and other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the contents of (for example, a hold image displaying a hold ball number symbol, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.). ) Is generated, and the detailed information is sorted by sprite to create a drawing list.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the sprite (display object) data is set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately sets the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And that information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The timekeeping counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 32 (b). ) Is executed (see S2603 and FIG. 39), the clock counter 233e is decremented by 1. As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, the above image data is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frames of a frame buffer area for storing an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 236 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list and writes it in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and also writes the image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. Is read out, and the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed format image data) of the sprite defined in the drawing list from the character storage area 235a according to the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and then draws the image data. Processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written to one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. By decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites specified in the drawing list, image data to be displayed in one frame is generated.

Writing one frame of image data to one frame buffer area and reading one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, both of which are completed in 20 milliseconds. Then, when the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written from the one frame buffer area is subsequently read, and the other is in the meantime. Image data for the next frame is written to the frame buffer area of.

In this way, by alternately writing image data and reading image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 22. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are explained first, and then the start-up process is performed. The main process will be explained.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 899,99,99,250), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then the first ball entry port is executed. The start winning process accompanying the winning of 64 is executed (S1105). The details of the variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 and 19, respectively.

After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S1106), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1107) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the variation processing (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation processing (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1201). The jackpot includes the middle of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S1201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S1202: No), then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1203). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: No), this process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1203, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N of the variable display held in the main control device 110). Is greater than 0 (S1204), and if the value of the hold ball counter 203a (hold ball number N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the hold ball counter 203a (hold ball number). N) is subtracted by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203c toward the execution area side, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold ball storage area 203c from the hold 1st area to the execution area and the hold 2nd area. → The data in each area is shifted in the order of hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area. After the data shift processing, the fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1207). The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the value (number of reserved balls N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 0 (S1204: No), a state in which the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, that is, , Determining whether or not the demo is in progress (S1208). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is larger than 0. Determine the interval as being demoed.

Then, if it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S1208: No), a demo command is set (S1209), this process is terminated, and if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S1208: Yes). This process ends as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1209 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 controls to display the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 according to the demo command.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, when the fluctuation display is not started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped, the demo command can be set and the demo effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1211), and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation processing is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1212). The stop symbol is set in advance by the fluctuation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, by the processing of S1206, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type. Depending on the value of the counter C2, a symbol that becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after a jackpot (a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds). It is determined whether the symbol is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to (probability change jackpot) or a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, a blue LED is turned on when a 15R probability variation jackpot is reached after a big hit, a red LED is turned on when a 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and a red LED and blue are turned on when a 15R normal jackpot is reached. LED and turn on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A confirmation command is set (S1213) to confirm the process, and this process ends. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 stops when the fluctuation time elapses, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the fluctuation start processing (S1207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S1207). This fluctuation start processing (S1207) is executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. , "Big hit" or "missing" lottery (win / fail determination), and determine the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, a lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c (S1301). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, "7,307,582" associated with the "low probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a becomes the jackpot random number value, and the pachinko machine When the gaming state of 10 is a high probability state, "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298, which is associated with the" high probability state "in the jackpot random number table 202a, 322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 "is the jackpot random number value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. Determine.

Then, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit as a result of the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), the jackpot time is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. The display mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202c, that is, the 15R probability variable jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, or the maximum number of rounds is 2. The display mode of the first symbol display device 37 based on whether it is a 2R probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a round jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. The lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is stopped in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81. Is set as.

Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of big hit is determined (S1303). The determination of the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the jackpot type set in the process of S1302, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

If it is determined in the process of S1301 that it is not a big hit (S1301: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. There is.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S1305). The determination of this fluctuation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is a high-probability state, a time-saving medium, or a low-probability state excluding the time-saving period), the stop type set in the processing of S1302, and the variation type counter CS1. It is performed based on the value of and the deviation pattern table 202d. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

When the process of S1303 or the process of S1305 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type determined by the process of S1303 or S1305 is set (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 22). To.

Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and if there is a starting winning. , Executes the hold processing of the value indicated by various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S1401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (S1401: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (the number of hold balls N of the variable effect held in the main control device 110) is changed. It is determined whether or not it is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1402). Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S1401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the number of balls on hold for operation is not N <4 (S1402: No). , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entry slot 64 (S1401: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (number of reserved balls N) is set. 1 is added (S1403), and each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 is added to the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S1404).

Next, a hold ball number command including the hold ball number N updated by the process of S1403 is created (S1405), the created hold ball number command is set (S1406), the start winning process is completed, and the timer interrupt is executed. Return to the interrupt process. This reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 in the main process (FIG. 22). The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of hold balls in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the hold ball number N included in the hold ball number command.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1501) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 311, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process shifts to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S1611 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1611 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1712 in FIG. 22, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1605: Yes). S1607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1610, interrupts are permitted (S1610). Then, it shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) of the variable winning device 65 in the case of a big hit state. A large open opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the mouth) 65a is executed (S1704). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The variation display of the second symbol is carried out at. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process is shifted to S1701 and each process after S1701 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1706, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 20 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1710 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1712), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1706 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1601). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1701. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 23, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1918 (see FIG. 24) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1915 in FIG. 24), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1918. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1918 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1802: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1918 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1918 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the data shifts to S1808.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1802: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1918. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1918 is executed (see S1917 in FIG. 24). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1918 is executed, the process of S1808 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1918 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and then an interrupt occurs. Set the permission (S1811) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1808 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1808 is performed via the process of S1804 to S1806. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the clear processing of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the processing is shifted to S1810, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S1810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clear processing of S1809 is that when the processing of S1808 is reached from S1804 via the processing of S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1804. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1901 was executed (S1901), and if 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), S1902. -The process proceeds to S1913 without performing the process of S1911.

In the process of S1901, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is a process in which S1902 to S1912 are related to display, voice, and operation setting of the first accessory 87 (that is, setting of effect), and have a short cycle (that is, setting of effect). This is because it is not necessary to edit within 1 msec), whereas it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S1913 and the command determination process of S1914 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1914 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S1913 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

When the process of S1901 is executed for the first time after the execution of the main process is started after the start-up process, the process proceeds to the process of S1902 as it is without determining whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed. Alternatively, when the process of S1901 is executed for the first time after the execution of the main process is started after the start-up process, the process may be shifted to the process of S1902 assuming that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1914 are transmitted to the display control device 114. Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the processing of S1907 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to is performed.

In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. It may be changed to an effect that can be held, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1907 is omitted.

Further, when an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect, the process of counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated by using the frame button operation number counter 223f is also a frame button input monitoring.・ It is performed in the production process. As a result, it is stocked that the frame button 22 has been operated by the number of frame button operations 223f. The operation of the frame button 22 stocked here is used to output an operation sound for notifying that the operation of the frame button 22 has occurred in accordance with the beat of the BGM.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1907) is completed, the sound editing / output processing is then executed (S1908). In the sound editing / output processing, the sound is produced according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main control device 110, and according to the input status to the first input port 64 and the operation status of the frame button 22. The sound output from the output device 226 is specified, the sound output LSI 301 is controlled, and a process of outputting various sounds from the sound output device 226 is executed. Details of this sound editing / output processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28.

Next, the lamp editing process is executed (S1909). In the lamp editing process, the third symbol is according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main control device 110, and according to the entry status to the first entry port 64 and the operation status of the frame button 22. The lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the display device 81.

Next, the first accessory edit drive process is executed (S1910). In the first accessory editing drive process, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e are driven and controlled according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main control device 110. The first accessory 87 is operated to execute the advance notice effect by the first accessory 87.

After the process of S1910, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1911), and then the counter update process is performed (S1912), and the process proceeds to the process of S1913. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. Further, the sound editing / output processing of S1908 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the counter update process, various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated. For example, the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is updated in this counter update process. The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is updated by adding 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this embodiment), reaching the maximum value (99), and then returning to 0.

In the process of S1913, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Executes the variable display process, which is a process of temporarily saving for transmission. The details of this variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. Then, after the fluctuation display processing, a command determination processing is performed (S1914), in which processing is performed according to the command received from the main control device 110. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

When the processing of S1914 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1915). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1917), and the power-off process is executed (S1918). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1919), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1916), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1916: No), the process returns to the process of S1901 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1916: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Further, the sound output from the sound output device 226 does not change, and the lighting / blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1914). This command determination process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Further, this process also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 when the hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the variation pattern type (either variation A to F or 2R variation) is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process. ..

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern type in the variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the display variation pattern command, and the variation effect is produced by the third symbol display device 81 according to the notified detailed variation pattern. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2003). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is further extracted. It is stored in the RAM 223 (S2005).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not the reserved ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the reserved ball number counter has been held by the main control device 110). (Number of reserved balls for variable effect) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2007).

Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, every time there is a starting winning, the process of S2008 , The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 is used when the start winning prize is detected. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Further, after the processing of S2007, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the holding ball number counter 223a updated by the processing of S2007 is set (S2008). As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether or not the start winning counter 223d is 3 (S2009), and if the starting winning counter 223d is not 3 (S2009: No), 1 is added to the starting winning counter 223d (S2010), and the process returns to the main process. .. If the start winning counter 223d is 3 (S2009: Yes), the process of S2010 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

By the process of S2010, 1 is added to the start winning counter 223d in accordance with the reception of the reserved ball number command. Since the hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 when there is a ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the start winning counter 223d enters the ball into the first ball entry port 64. It means that the number of (starting prizes) is counted. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stocks the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 by the start winning counter 223d.

When the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is turned on and the time-saving BGM is being reproduced as the BGM, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 stocked here is at the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM. , It is used to pronounce one of the constituent tones of the time-saving BGM chord at that time. As a result, the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is pronounced in accordance with the beat and chord of the time-saving BGM, so that the player can hear a rhythmic and pleasant voice. ..

Further, if the number of balls entered into the first ball opening 64 stocked in the starting winning counter 223d is 3 according to the judgment of S2009, the starting winning counter 223d will enter the first ball opening 64 any more. Even if the ball is not stocked and the ball enters the first entry port 64, the entry is invalid in terms of counting by the start winning counter 223d.

In this pachinko machine 10, since the incoming ball sound is pronounced in accordance with the beat (or back beat) of the time-saving BGM, when many incoming balls to the first incoming ball opening 64 are stocked, they are finally stocked. The pronunciation of the incoming ball for the incoming ball will be delayed significantly from the actual incoming ball, and the difference between the actual incoming ball and the pronunciation timing of the incoming ball will be noticeable, which will make the player feel uncomfortable. This is because there is a risk of hugging them. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, by limiting the stock of balls entering the first ball entry port 64 to three balls, it is possible to prevent a significant difference between the actual ball entry and the sounding timing of the entry sound. can.

Further, if the tempo of the time-saving BGM (the number of beats in one minute) is, for example, 160 BPM (Beats Per Munute), the firing of balls is less than 100 balls per minute, so the time of one beat. It is almost impossible for more than 3 balls to be entered into the first winning opening 64 to be stocked. Therefore, even if the entry to the first entry port 64 is restricted so as not to stock more than three, the entry to the first entry opening 64 in which the entry sound is not pronounced may realistically occur. However, the fact that the incoming ball sound is not pronounced does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

If it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S2006 (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2011), the process shifts to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as the display demo command and the display confirmation command by the process of S2011, and are transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the variation display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S1913).

This variation display process (S1913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110, and a display stop type for transmitting the stop type extracted from the stop type command to the display control device 114. This is the process of generating a command. Further, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated along with the display of the variation effect, and the display reserved ball number command is set in order to notify the display control device 114 of the updated reserved ball number.

In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have not been received from the main controller 110. Ends the variable display process and returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the processing of S2002 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 25). The variation pattern type (any of the variation A to F, 2R variation) in the variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S2005 are acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is read out, the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b, the variation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103, and the game state (normal state, of the current pachinko machine 10) of the current pachinko machine 10. A detailed fluctuation pattern is determined based on the probabilistic variation state or the time saving state) and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a (S2104).

As the fluctuation pattern type notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, only the fluctuation time is specified. However, according to this S2104, one of various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time is specified. One variation pattern is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed.

The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the stop type indicated by the stop type command received so far (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, front / rear out reach, front / rear out reach, complete out of reach). It can be judged based on the number of fluctuations.

For example, when a stop type command corresponding to a certain variation effect indicates a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot as the stop type, the pachinko machine 10 is used from after the jackpot effect after the variation effect until the next jackpot. It is determined that the gaming state is a probable change state. In addition, when a 15R normal jackpot is indicated as the stop type in the stop type command corresponding to a certain variation effect, after the jackpot effect after the variation effect, until the variation effect is performed 100 times, or next, the jackpot is performed. Until, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the time saving state. Then, after the fluctuation effect 100 times, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big hit.

In addition, the ending command (command for producing an effect indicating the end of the jackpot) transmitted from the main control device 110 at the end of the jackpot includes the gaming state (probability change state or time saving state) of the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot. The voice lamp control device 113 may determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 from the gaming state included in this ending command. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the big hit included in the ending command is the time saving state, the time is set until the variation effect of 100 times is performed, and then until the next big hit. Judged as normal.

When a detailed fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, then a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined detailed variation pattern is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Temporarily stored in RAM 223 for transmission to (S2105). Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired by the processing of S2103 is generated, and the command is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 for transmission to the display control device 114. (S2106).

When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect. Further, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol suitable for the stop type is selected, and the variation effect started by the display variation pattern command is confirmed and displayed. Display the selected stop symbol.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated by the processing of S2105 and S2106 are not immediately transmitted to the display control device 114, but are being reproduced. It is transmitted at the timing of the beat of. The timing of starting the variation effect is determined by the control of the main control device 110 regardless of the rhythm of the BGM output by the voice lamp control device 113.

However, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display variation pattern command generated by receiving the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 at the timing of the beat of the BGM being played. Therefore, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 by the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is started in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM.

Further, in the display control device 114, in the variable display of the third symbol, various characters appear according to the beat cycle of the BGM, the effect image is displayed, the pseudo stop is performed, and the final display is performed. The display data table and the additional data table are specified so that the stop display is temporarily displayed.

Therefore, by starting the variable display of the third symbol according to the timing of the beat of the BGM, the appearance of various characters, the display of the effect image, the pseudo stop, the temporary stop display before the final display, etc. are displayed. , Both are performed at the timing of the BGM beat. That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is started in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and the player can be shown as if the stop display was performed. In addition, various effect images displayed during the variable effect can be displayed according to the beat of the BGM.

Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling that the variable effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, the value of the hold ball counter 223a is decremented by 1 as the hold ball is consumed (that is, the change display corresponding to the hold ball is set) with the setting of the display change pattern command. (S2107), a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the hold ball number indicated by the value of the hold ball number counter 223a after the update is set (S2108). The display control device 114 executes a process of displaying the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined by the processing of S2104 is specified (S2109). In the MPU 221, according to the data table specified here, the sound output from the audio output device 226 and the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 228 are performed while adjusting to the variation effect of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The operation of the first accessory 87 is controlled.

Then, a display variation start command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect is set (S2110), and the process returns to the main process. The display variation start command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (see FIG. 24).

As described above, the display variation pattern command generated by the processing of S2104 is not transmitted until the timing of the BGM beat, and the third symbol display device 81 uses the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. The variable display of the third symbol is not executed until the timing of the BGM beat. However, the start timing of the variation effect is determined by the main control device 110 regardless of the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the variation pattern command instructing the start of the variation effect is transmitted from the main control device 110. Then, the third symbol display device 81 must start the variable display of the third symbol.

When the pachinko machine 10 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the pachinko machine 10 temporarily transmits a display variation start command to the display control device 114 by the process of S2110. In response to this display variation start command, the display control device 114 starts the variation effect by performing a display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down. After that, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 at the timing of the BGM beat, so that the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is transmitted from the BGM beat timing. Starts the variable display of the third symbol by. This makes it possible for the player to make it appear as if the variable effect was started in time with the beat of the BGM.

Next, the sound editing / output processing (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. 27 and 28 are flowcharts showing this sound editing / output processing (S1908). As described above, the sound editing / output processing follows the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main control device 110, and also according to the entry status to the first entry port 64 and the operation status of the frame button 22. Accordingly, the sound output from the voice output device 226 is specified, the sound output LSI 301 is controlled, and a process of outputting various voices from the voice output device 226 is executed.

First, referring to FIG. 27, when the execution of the sound editing / output processing is started, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S2121). As described above, the timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the beat cycle T of the BGM being played, and when the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat cycle T (S2121: Yes), the BGM being played is being played. Then, it is determined that the timing of the beat has come, and then the execution of a new effect is determined according to the command from the main control device 110 by the process of S2109 of the variation display process (see FIG. 26), and the execution of the new effect is determined in response to the effect. It is determined whether or not the data table to be used has been specified (S2122).

The data table is a table in which various control information to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 is defined in chronological order, and is provided after the effects for all the effects whose execution is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113. It is a thing.

When it is determined that the data table to be used has been specified in the processing of S2122 (S2122: Yes), the use of the specified data table is set (S2123), the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S2124), and the pointer is initialized to 0 (S2124). The process proceeds to S2125.

The MPU 221 sequentially counts up the pointer 223g initialized in S2124, and stores various control information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the data table set to be used by the processing of S2123 in the data table storage area. Read from 222b, and according to the control information, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, operation of the first accessory 87 (for the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation). (Drive of motor 87e) is controlled.

Here, since the data table to be used is set at the timing of the beat of the BGM, even if the effect to be executed according to the command from the main control device 110 is determined at an arbitrary timing, the audio output corresponding to the effect is performed. The voice output from the device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM.

If the data table to be used is not specified as a result of the processing of S2122 (S2122: No), the processing of S2123 and S2124 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S2125.

In the process of S2125, it is determined by the process of S2105 and S2106 of the variation display process (see FIG. 26) whether or not there is a temporarily saved display variation pattern command and a display stop type command (S2125). Then, when the temporarily saved display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are in the RAM 223 (S2125), the temporarily saved display variation pattern command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. (S2126), and is set to transmit the temporarily saved display stop type command to the display control device 114 (S2127). Then, the process proceeds to S2128. The display variation start command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (see FIG. 24).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated by the processing of S2105 and S2106 are not immediately transmitted to the display control device 114, but are reproduced. It is transmitted at the timing of the beat of BGM. As a result, even if the start of the variation effect is determined at an arbitrary timing in the main control device 110, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 by the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command can be displayed. It can be started at the timing of the beat of BGM.

Then, in the display control device 114, in the variable display of the third symbol, various characters appear according to the beat cycle of the BGM, the effect image is displayed, the pseudo stop is performed, and the final display is performed. The display data table and the additional data table are specified so that the stop display is temporarily displayed. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the third symbol according to the timing of the beat of the BGM, the appearance of various characters, the display of the effect image, the pseudo stop, the temporary stop display before the final display, etc. are displayed. , Both can be performed at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling that the variable effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

If it is determined by the processing of S2125 that the temporarily saved display variation pattern command and the display stop type command do not exist in the RAM 223 (S2125: No), the processing of S2126 and S2127 is skipped and the processing of S2128 is performed. Move to.

In the processing of S2128, 1 is added to the pointer 223g (S2128), and then the control information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 223g is read out in the data table set by the processing of S2123 (S2129). The MPU 221 reads the control information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the data table while counting up the pointer 223g by one, and this sound is based on the control information specified in chronological order by the data table. The audio output from the audio output device 226 and the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227 by the edit / output process, the lamp edit process (S1909) of the main process (see FIG. 24), and the first accessory edit drive process (S1910). , Controls the operation of the first accessory 87 (driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e).

Here, the processing of S2129 is performed at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. That is, the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10, the voice output, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the control information read by the process of S2129 includes the sound reproduction start information (S2130). As a result, if there is sound reproduction start information (S2130: Yes), a reproduction start command including information on the sound to start reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2131) according to the sound reproduction start information, and the process of S2132 is performed. Transition. The sound output LSI starts reproduction of the sound indicated by the reproduction start command based on the set reproduction start command, and outputs the sound from the audio output device 226.

If there is no sound reproduction start information in the process of S2130 (S2130: No), the process of S2131 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2132. In the process of S2132, it is determined whether or not the control information read by the process of S2129 includes the sound reproduction stop information (S2132). As a result, if there is sound reproduction stop information (S2132: Yes), a reproduction stop command including information on the sound to stop reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2133) according to the sound reproduction stop information, and the process of S2134 is started. Transition. The sound output LSI stops the reproduction of the sound indicated by the reproduction stop command based on the set reproduction stop command.

Here, in the control information read from the data table by the processing of S2129, it is the sound other than the BGM that is instructed to start or stop the reproduction of the sound. That is, for sounds other than BGM, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, the reproduction of the sound can be started and stopped at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the player can play the rhythmic game. It should be noted that the BGM sound reproduction start and stop is not related to the BGM beat timing, but the BGM that has been reproduced until then at the stage when the BGM change timing is reached by the processing of S2143 (see FIG. 28) described later. Playback is stopped and new BGM playback is started.

If it is determined by the process of S2132 that there is no sound reproduction stop information (S2132: No), the process of S2133 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2134. If the value of the timer counter 223h is different from the BGM beat cycle T (S2121: No) due to the processing of S2121, the processing of S2122 to S2133 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2134.

In the processing of S2134, it is determined whether or not the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on (S2134), and if the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on (S2134: Yes), the start winning sound output processing is executed (S2135). ). In the start winning sound output processing, when the time-saving BGM is being played as the BGM, the entry sound for notifying the entry to the first entry opening 64 at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM is transmitted. This is a process of making one of the constituent tones of the BGM chord for time saving sound at a pitch. Details of this start winning sound output process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

In the process of S2134, when it is determined that the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is off (S2134: No), or after the start winning sound output process (S2135) is executed, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is turned on. Whether or not it is determined (S2136). As a result, if the frame button operation effect flag 223e is on (S2136: Yes), the frame button operation sound output process is executed (S2137). In this frame button operation sound output process, when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed, the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat being played at that time. This is a process in which one of the constituent sounds of the BGM chord at that time is pronounced at the pitch of the operation sound for notifying the fact. This frame button operation sound output process is configured by the same process as the start winning sound output process, and the details thereof will be described after the description of the start winning sound output process.

In the process of S2136, when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is determined to be off (S2136: No), or after the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) is executed, the process of S2138 shown in FIG. 28 is followed. Move to. In the process of S2138, it is determined whether or not the control information read by the process of S2129 (see FIG. 27) includes the start information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2138). Then, if there is effect start information that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2138: Yes), the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to ON, and the frame button operation count counter 223f is initialized to 0. (S2139). As a result, when the above-mentioned frame button operation sound output process (S2137) is executed and the frame button 22 is operated during the production requiring the operation of the frame button 22, the operation sound is the beat or the back beat of the BGM. The process that is output at the timing is executed.

In the process of S2138, when it is determined that there is no start information of the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 (S2138: No), or after the process of S2139 is executed, then S2129 (see FIG. 27). It is determined whether or not there is end information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 in the control information read by the process of (S2140). Then, if there is end information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: Yes), the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to off (S2141). As a result, the execution of the process in which the operation sound of the frame button 22 is output at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat is completed.

In the processing of S2140, when it is determined that there is no end information of the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: No), or after the processing of S2141 is executed, the value of the timer counter 223h is then set. Update (S2142). To update the timer counter 223h, set 1 when the value of the timer counter 223h is the cycle T of the beat of the BGM being played, and when the value of the timer counter 223h is a value different from the cycle T, the timer counter 223h is updated. 1 is added to the timer counter 223h. As a result, the timer counter 223h can count the cycle of the BGM beat during playback.

Here, the tempo of each BGM is predetermined so that the period T of the beat is a multiple of 2 milliseconds. As a result, the timing of the BGM beat and the timing of the back beat can be easily determined only by performing the process of adding 1 to the timer counter 223h every 1 millisecond.

Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM is changed at the same time (S2143). The BGM change timing includes, for example, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM output when the jackpot is notified and the timing of starting or ending the reproduction of the jackpot effect BGM output at the time of the jackpot production. In the production, there is a timing at which the reach effect is started, the timing at which the reproduction of the reach effect BGM is started, the timing at which the reproduction of the reach effect BGM is ended, and the like. These timings are grasped according to the control information specified in the data table set at each time and the command received from the main control device 110.

If it is determined by the processing of S2143 that it is the BGM change timing (S2143), the BGM specified by the control information in the data table or the BGM corresponding to the command received from the main control device 110 is specified to start playback. The command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2144). As a result, the reproduction of the designated BGM is started and is output from the audio output device 226.

Next, the tempo of the type of BGM at which reproduction is started is read from the ROM 222, the cycle T (milliseconds) of the beat of the BGM is calculated, and stored in the RAM 223 (S2145). At this time, the beat cycle T (milliseconds) is calculated by calculating 6000 milliseconds / (BGM tempo). If the ROM 222 has a BGM beat cycle T (milliseconds) specified in advance instead of the BGM tempo, the S2145 process reads the BGM beat cycle of the type from which playback is started from the ROM 222. Just put it out.

Further, the timer counter 223h is initialized to 1 (S2146). By updating the timer counter 223h while counting up in the sound editing / output processing executed every 1 millisecond, and counting up to the BGM beat cycle T calculated in the processing of S2145, the MPU221 can be used. , The timer counter 223h can be used to grasp the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced.

Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM for which playback is started is a time-saving BGM (S2147), and if it is a time-saving BGM (S2147: Yes), the time-saving BGM playback flag 223c is set to ON (S2148). If it is not a time-saving BGM (S2148: No), the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to off (S2149). As a result, while the time-saving BGM is being played as the BGM, by the processing of S2134 and S2135 (see FIG. 27), the ball-in sound notifying the ball entering the first ball-entry port 64 is the beat of the time-saving BGM. The start winning sound output process that is played back at the timing is executed.

After the processing of S2148 or S2149 is completed, the sound editing / output processing is finished and the process returns to the main processing. Further, even if it is determined that it is not the BGM change timing as a result of the processing of S2143 (S2143: No), the sound editing / output processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the start winning sound output process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. 29 and 30 are flowcharts showing the start winning sound output process (S2135). As described above, in the start winning sound output processing, when the time-saving BGM is being played as the BGM, the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is notified at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM. This is a process of producing a sound at a pitch, which is one of the constituent sounds of the BGM chord for shortening the time at that time.

With reference to FIG. 29, in the start winning sound output processing, first, it is determined whether or not the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is being executed (S2151). The winning sound immediate reproduction effect is not to output the winning sound at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the time-saving BGM in the variable effect, but to reduce the time when the ball enters the first entrance 64. It is a production that outputs a ball entry sound at a predetermined pitch without waiting for the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, and is one of the warning productions that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high. Whether or not to execute the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is determined based on the detailed variation pattern determined by the variation display process (see FIG. 26).

Normally, the player outputs a pitching sound that matches the chord of the time-saving BGM in accordance with the rhythm of the time-saving BGM, whereas the winning sound is immediately reproduced. By recognizing that the incoming ball sound deviates from the rhythm of the time-saving BGM and is pronounced at a predetermined pitch, it is highly expected that it will be a big hit in the variable production, and the interest in the game will be enhanced. be able to.

When the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is being executed (S2151: Yes), it is determined whether or not the starting winning counter 223d is 0 (S2152). If the start winning counter 223d is 0 (S2152: Yes), there is no entry into the first entry opening 64, so the start winning sound output process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the start winning counter 223d is not 0 (S2152), it means that the ball has entered the first entry port 64, so that the start winning sound reproduction start command with the pitch set to a predetermined pitch Is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2153). As a result, the winning sound having a predetermined pitch is output from the voice output device 226 without waiting for the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat. Next, the start winning counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S2154) to end the start winning sound output process.

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S2151 that the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is not executed (S2151: No), then whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat cycle T of the time saving BGM. Is determined (S2155). As a result, when the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T (S2155: Yes), since it is the timing of the beat of the BGM for shortening the time, the sound of the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is sounded. Perform the processing for. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the start winning counter 223d is 0 (S2156).

If the value of the start winning counter 223d is not 0 (S2156: No), the entry to the first entry opening 64 is stocked, and the process of sounding the entry sound is executed. First, in the BGM being played, it is determined whether or not the chord is changed from the current beat (S2157). The progress of the time-saving BGM code is stored in the ROM 222, and the MPU 221 grasps the BGM beat code according to the progress of the reproduction of the time-saving BGM.

Here, the progress of the time-saving BGM code stored in the ROM 222 is associated with the elapsed time from the start of the reproduction of the BGM, and the BGM code from the elapsed time is defined. For example, the code "D" is associated with the elapsed time of 0 ms, the code "G" is associated with the elapsed time of 720 ms, and the code "A" is associated with the elapsed time of 1440 ms. Attached, "D" is associated with the elapsed time of 2160 milliseconds, and the association ends. When the MPU221 starts playing the BGM voice, it monitors the playback elapsed time, and the BGM code is "D" from immediately after the BGM playback starts until the BGM playback elapsed time reaches 720 milliseconds. From 720 ms to 1440 ms, the BGM code is "G", and the BGM play start time is 1440 ms to 2160 ms. It is determined that the code is "A". Then, when the playback start time of the BGM is 2160 milliseconds, after determining that the BGM code is "D", the playback elapsed time of the BGM is reset to 0 milliseconds, and the playback elapsed time of the BGM is again. While monitoring, determine the BGM code at that time. As a result, the progress of the chord can be accurately grasped for the BGM in which the same melody is repeatedly played.

When the chord is changed from the current beat (S2157: Yes), the reproduction start command of the incoming note with the pitch as the root note of the chord is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2159), and the process proceeds to S2166. The root note of a chord is the basic note in a chord. By the process of S2159, the input sound having the pitch as the root sound of the chord is output from the voice output device 226. When a pitch other than the root note of the chord is output at the timing of the beat when the BGM chord is changed, the player recognizes the note as a note that deviates from the chord, and the player feels uncomfortable. There is a risk of causing it. On the other hand, by making the incoming ball sound having the root sound as the pitch, the player can hear the incoming ball sound as a sound matching the changed chord. Therefore, it is possible to hear a sound that is comfortable for the player.

If the chord is not changed at the current beat as a result of the processing of S2157 (S2157: No), then it is determined whether or not the elapsed sound sounding flag 223j is on (S2160). As a result, if the elapsed sound sounding flag 223j is off (S2160: No), the chord information in the current beat is read from ROM 222, and the pitch used as the pitch of one winning note from the constituent tones constituting the chord. (S2161), the playback start instruction of the winning sound with the selected constituent sound as the pitch is set in the sound output LSI (S2162), and the process proceeds to S2166.

As a result, the winning sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord is output from the voice output device 226. Further, the incoming ball sound is not only pronounced according to the beat of the time saving BGM, but also is pronounced at a pitch matching the chord of the time saving BGM at that time. Therefore, since the chord is composed of the incoming ball sound and the time-saving BGM, the player can hear a more pleasant voice. In addition, when the ball continues to enter the first ball entry port 64, a melody accompanied by a time-saving BGM can be composed by the ball entry sound and can be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the number of entering balls. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the incoming ball sound from time to time.

If it is determined that the elapsed sound sounding flag 223j is on as a result of the processing of S2160 (S2160: Yes), it means that the incoming sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch is sounded at the timing of the immediately preceding back beat. Therefore, at the timing of the beat here, the incoming sound having the constituent sound corresponding to the pronounced elapsed sound as the pitch is produced. Specifically, the pitch reproduced in the previous beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (S2163), and the sound to be reproduced corresponding to the pitch reproduced in the previous beat for the current BGM code. The pitch is selected from the pitch setting table 222c during playback of the elapsed sound (S2164). Then, the reproduction start command of the winning sound having the selected pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2165), and the process proceeds to S2166.

Here, when the chord at the beat of a certain BGM is "C" and the incoming note having the constituent sound "mi" as the pitch is produced at that time, the pitch "mi" is used as the pitch information memory. Store in 223k. When the incoming note whose pitch is the elapsed note of the chord "C" is to be sounded at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, the pitch of the incoming note pronounced in the immediately preceding beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k ( In this example, in "mi") and the chord "C", the pitch of the elapsed sound corresponding to the constituent sound "mi" is specified from the pitch setting table 222c at the time of reproducing the elapsed sound. In the present embodiment, "fa" is specified as the pitch of the elapsed sound, and an incoming sound having the elapsed sound "fa" as the pitch is produced at the timing of the back beat.

Then, when the incoming sound having the constituent sound of the chord "C" as the pitch is produced at the timing of the next BGM beat following the back beat (that is, when the elapsed sound sounding flag 223j is on), From the pitch information memory 223k, the pitch of the incoming ball sounded in the immediately preceding beat is read out (“mi” in this example), and the chord “C” is configured with the next beat corresponding to the constituent note “mi”. The pitch of the sound is specified from the pitch setting table 222c during playback of the elapsed sound. In the present embodiment, "so" is specified as the pitch of the constituent sound in the next beat, and the incoming sound having the constituent sound "so" as the pitch is produced at the timing of the next beat.

As a result, in each of the first BGM beat, the subsequent back beat, and the subsequent beat, the incoming sound is pronounced in the order of "mi", "fa", and "so" corresponding to the BGM chord "C". Therefore, when the incoming note with the elapsed note as the pitch is produced in the back beat between the beats at which the incoming note that pitches the constituent notes of the chord is produced, a strange pitch transition is performed. It is possible to suppress that a sound is produced or that a pitch deviating from the elapsed sound produced in the back beat is produced in the beat after the back beat. Therefore, it is possible to play a beautiful melody when the incoming sound is pronounced while inserting the elapsed sound.

In the processing of S2166, the pitch reproduced as the winning sound by the processing of S2159, S2162, and S2165 is stored in the pitch information memory 223k (S2166). Then, since one sound for entering the ball into the first entry port 64 is pronounced, the start winning counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S2167). After that, the elapsed sound sounding flag 223j is set to off (S2168), and the start winning sound output process is terminated.

As a result of the processing of S2156, when the value of the start winning counter 223d is 0 (S2156: Yes), since the entry to the first entry opening 64 is not stocked, after turning off the elapsed sound sounding flag 223j ( S2168), the start winning sound output process is terminated.

When the value of the timer counter 223h is not the BGM beat cycle T as a result of the processing of S2155 (S2156: No), then, referring to FIG. 30, the value of the timer counter 223h is half of the BGM beat cycle. It is determined whether or not it is T / 2 (S2169). As a result, if the value of the timer counter 223h is not T / 2 (S2169: No), the start winning sound output process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the timer counter 223h is T / 2 (S2169: Yes), it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM being played, so that the start winning counter 223d is larger than 1 and at the immediately preceding beat. It is determined whether or not the incoming ball sound is produced (S2170).

If the start winning counter 223d is 1 or less, or if the entry sound is not sounded in the immediately preceding beat (S2170: No), the start winning sound output process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the start winning counter 223d is larger than 1 and the entry sound is sounded at the immediately preceding beat (S2170: Yes), then the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat are stored in ROM222. (S2171), and it is determined whether or not the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat match (S2172).

As a result, when the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat match (S2172: Yes), the pitch of the incoming pitch reproduced in the previous beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (S2173). , The pitch to be reproduced corresponding to the pitch reproduced in the previous beat for the current chord is selected from the elapsed tone reproduction pitch setting table 222c (S2174). Then, the reproduction start command of the winning sound having the selected pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2175). As a result, at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, the winning sound of the pitch selected from the pitch setting table 222c during the elapsed sound reproduction is output from the audio output device 226.

Here, the pitch of the incoming pitch output at the timing of the beat of the BGM is a constituent sound of the chord, whereas it is selected by the pitch setting table 222c during the elapsed sound reproduction at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. Pitch is the elapsed note of a chord. As a result, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 continuously, not only the standard sound of the chord but also the back beat of the BGM is used to generate the entry sound while inserting the elapsed sound of the chord. Therefore, a more complicated melody can be played by the incoming sound. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

In addition, the pitch of the incoming pitch to be pronounced in the back beat of the BGM is determined based on the pitch of the incoming pitch pronounced in the previous beat by the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c, and further, the pitch of the incoming ball to be pronounced in the back beat of the BGM is determined. The pitch of the incoming ball sound to be pronounced by the beat is also decided. As a result, when the incoming note with the elapsed note as the pitch is produced in the back beat between the beats at which the incoming note that pitches the constituent notes of the chord is produced, the pitch is strange. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the elapsed sound or the sound of a pitch that deviates from the elapsed sound produced in the back beat in the beat after the back beat. Therefore, it is possible to play a beautiful melody when the incoming sound is pronounced while inserting the elapsed sound.

Next, the elapsed sound sounding flag 223j indicating that the elapsed sound was sounded was set to ON (S2176), and the ball-in sound corresponding to the ball-in was sounded, so that the value of the start winning counter 223d was subtracted by 1 (S2179). ), Start Winning sound output processing ends.

On the other hand, if the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat do not match as a result of the processing of S2172 (S2172: No), the current BGM chord information is read from ROM 222, and the constituent tones constituting the chord are read. The pitch of the incoming ball is selected from (S2177), and the reproduction start command of the incoming sound with the selected constituent sound as the pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2178). If the elapsed sound of the chord is output here, the chord is changed at the next beat, so that the elapsed sound becomes a floating sound, and the player hears a strange melody. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat do not match due to the processing of S2177 and S2178, the input ball with the constituent notes of the chord as the pitch in the back beat of the BGM. Since the sound is output from the voice output device 226, the player can hear a beautiful melody according to the chord.

After the process of S2178, the value of the start winning counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S2179), and the start winning sound output process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the sounding timing of the entry sound when the start winning sound output process is executed will be described. First, FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming ball sound when each ball enters the first incoming ball opening 64 one by one during one beat of the BGM. As shown in FIG. 31, in this case, the ball entered into the first entry port 64 in the middle of the BGM beat is stocked, and the entry sound is sounded at the timing of the BGM beat. At this time, at the timing of the first beat in which the chord is changed, an incoming note having the root note (“do” in the example of FIG. 31) of the chord (“C” in the example of FIG. 31) is pronounced. Then, unless the chord is changed, an incoming sound having the pitch of the constituent tones of the chord (either "do", "mi", or "so" in the example of FIG. 31) is produced.

In this way, since the incoming ball sound is pronounced in accordance with the beat of the time-saving BGM, a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically according to the rhythm of the time-saving BGM, the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Further, when the incoming ball sound is pronounced, the pitch of the incoming ball sound is determined based on the chord of the time-saving BGM at the sounding timing. Specifically, as the pitch of the incoming ball, one is selected from the pitches of the constituent notes constituting the chord. As a result, not only the incoming ball sound is pronounced according to the beat of the time-saving BGM, but also the pitch is sounded according to the chord of the time-saving BGM at that time. Therefore, since the chord is composed of the incoming ball sound and the time-saving BGM, the player can hear a more pleasant voice.

Next, FIG. 32 (a) is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the entry sound when three balls enter the first entry port 64 during one beat of the BGM, and FIG. 32 (b). ), Two balls enter the first entrance 64 during one beat of BGM, and one more ball enters the first entrance 64 until the back beat of the next one beat. It is a figure explaining the sounding timing of the entry sound when entering the ball, and FIG. 32 (c) shows that one ball enters the first entry port 64 during one beat of BGM. It is a figure explaining the sounding timing of the entry sound when two more balls enter the first entry opening 64 until the back beat of the next one beat.

In the cases of FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c), one of the balls corresponds to the timing of the next beat of one beat when the balls of 1 to 3 enter the first entry port 64. The incoming note is pronounced with the constituent notes of the chord at the timing of the beat as the pitch. Next, at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, the number of balls entering the first entry port 64 in the stock in which the entry sound is not sounded is two or more, and the entry sound is pronounced at the immediately preceding beat. On condition that it is done, the incoming ball sound is pronounced. That is, in each of the examples of FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c), the incoming ball sound is produced by the back beat of the BGM. Then, at the timing of the next beat after the back beat, the incoming ball sound is further pronounced.

Here, as a condition for the entry sound to be pronounced at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, there are two or more balls entering the first entry opening 64 in the stock in which the entry sound is not pronounced. In addition, the condition that the incoming ball sound was produced in the immediately preceding beat is to make the incoming ball sound continuously in the previous beat, the current back beat, and the next beat. be. As a result, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 continuously, not only the timing of the beat but also the previous beat, the current back beat, and the next beat are continuously performed. By pronouncing the incoming ball sound, more diverse rhythms can be engraved with the incoming ball sound. Further, since the incoming ball sound is not pronounced in the beat and the incoming ball sound is pronounced in the back beat, it is possible to suppress the impression that the rhythm of the incoming ball sound does not match that of BGM.

In addition, in the two beats, the incoming note whose pitch is the constituent note of the chord is produced, and in the back beat between these two beats, the incoming note whose pitch is the elapsed note of the constituent note of the chord is produced. Be pronounced. As a result, while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM, the incoming sound is produced while inserting the incoming sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch between the incoming sound having the constituent sound of the BGM chord as the pitch. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to give variation to the melody by the incoming ball sound accompanied by the time-saving BGM. Therefore, the melody due to the incoming ball sound does not become monotonous, and it is possible to output a voice that does not make the player bored.

In the sound editing / output processing (see FIG. 27), the details of the frame button operation sound output processing (S2137), which is executed when the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is performed, are the start prize. It is almost the same as the sound output process (see FIGS. 29 and 30). Specifically, the start winning sound counter 223d used in the starting winning sound output processing is replaced with the frame button operation count counter 223f, and the sound to be pronounced is replaced from the winning sound to the operation sound, which is called the frame button operation sound output processing. Become. By executing the frame button operation sound output processing, it is possible to exert the same action and effect as the winning sound output by the starting winning sound output processing in the operating sound.

In particular, since the operation sound is pronounced in accordance with the beat of the BGM, a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as rhythmically operating the frame button 22 according to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Further, when the operation sound is pronounced, the pitch of the operation sound is determined based on the BGM chord at the sounding timing. Therefore, by operating the frame button 22, a melody based on the operation sound is played, so that it is possible to output voice that does not make the player bored.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 43, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when this is done. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted by the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds to complete the drawing process of the image for one frame. do.

Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

In this main process, the initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, a process of clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup has started normally.

After the process of S2401, the interrupt permission is set (S2402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b). FIG. 32 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt process, first, the command determination process (S2602) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2603) is executed. In the command determination process (S2602), the content of the command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the detailed variation pattern corresponds to the detailed variation pattern. The variable display data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode such as the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38.

In the display setting process (S2603), the address indicated by the pointer 233c is defined based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S2602) or the like. According to the drawn content, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specifically specified.

Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42.

After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, the task process is then executed (S2604). In this task process, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2603). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2605). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2604), and the drawing list is generated. It is transmitted to the image controller 237. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, the update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2606). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2606, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front / rear out reach, front / rear deviation other than The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete deviation) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2602), which is one process of the V interrupt process, will be described. First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this command determination process. The command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2701: No), the command determination process is terminated. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702), and then For all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2703).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a hold ball number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2704), and if there is a hold ball number command for display (S2704: Yes), the hold ball number command process is performed. Is executed (S2705), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2705) will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (a). FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This hold ball number command process executes the process corresponding to the display hold ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hold ball count command process, first, the new hold ball count command flag is turned on (S2801). The new reserved ball count command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S2603) that the display reserved ball count command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the reserved ball number information included in the display reserved ball number command is acquired (S2802).

If two or more display hold ball count commands are stored in the command buffer area in the process of S2802, the hold ball count information is acquired from the display hold ball count command stored last. As a result, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the process of S2802 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to the other number of reserved balls are turned off. (S2803), the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the new reserved ball count command flag is on, by referring to the number determination flag, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the number determination flag for which the on is set is set to a small area. The reserved image data is expanded so as to be displayed in Ds1.

Returning to FIG. 35, when it is determined that there is no display reserved ball count command in the processing of S2704 (S2704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. Then (S2706), if there is a confirmation command for display (S2706: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S2707), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the confirmation command processing (S2707) will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (b). FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command processing. This confirmation command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the confirmation command process (S2707), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2811), and this processing is terminated. The confirmation command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S2603) that a display confirmation command has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. .. In addition, if the confirmation command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set for the variable effect has elapsed after processing the display setting of the variable effect, the restart effect (the third symbol is swung up and down). The display setting process is executed so that the effect) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the present embodiment, it seems as if the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM. For this fake display, the fluctuation table display data table is specified for a time shorter than the original fluctuation time so that the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM by the fluctuation display data table described later. It is realized by that. In the present embodiment, after that, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original confirmed display timing is reached, and the original fluctuation time is secured. As a result, the player can be made to think that the fluctuation effect is stopped according to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game while matching the rhythm of the BGM.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined that there is no display confirmation command in the processing of S2706 (S2706: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands (S2706: No). S2708), if there is a display demo command (S2708: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S2709), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the demo command processing (S2709) will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (c). FIG. 36 (c) is a flowchart showing demo command processing. This demo command process executes the process corresponding to the display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the demo command process (S2709), first, the demo display data table corresponding to the demo effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2821). Next, the Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233b and its contents are cleared (S2822).

Next, the time data corresponding to the demo effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2823), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2824). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to off, the demo display flag is set to on, and the confirmation display flag is set to off (S2825), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demo display flag is a flag indicating that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmation display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state.

By executing this demo command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S2824, from the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2821. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Further, in the display setting process, the time of the demo effect specified in the demo display data table is timed by using the time counter 233e in which the time data corresponding to the demo effect is set by the process of S2823, and the process of S2825 is performed. When it is determined by the timing of the display setting control timekeeping counter 233e that the demo effect in the demo display data table has been completed based on the states of the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag set by, the next effect to be displayed. As a result, control is performed so that the demo effect is displayed again.

If both the confirmed command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-mentioned confirmed command process (S2707) is executed first and the confirmed command flag is turned on. After being set, this demo command process (S2709) is executed, and the confirmation command flag is turned off by the process of S2825.

As a result, in such a case, the demo effect is displayed without performing the final display effect. The main control device 110 is configured to transmit a demo command if the start timing of the variation effect does not come after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after the confirmation command is transmitted. , The confirmation command and the demo command cannot be stored together in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command judgment process. Therefore, if any of these commands is stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, it is highly possible that the commands are not transmitted / received normally.

In such a case, the display control device 114 gives priority to the demo effect not directly related to the game and displays it on the third symbol display device 81, so that the erroneous definite display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a misunderstanding about the game result. Further, by starting the demo effect without performing the final display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call a person involved in the hall and request a countermeasure.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined that there is no display demo command in the processing of SS2708 (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation start command among the unprocessed commands. (S2710) If there is a display variation start command (S2710: Yes), the variation start command process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the fluctuation start command processing (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (a). FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the variation start command processing. This fluctuation start command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation start command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display variation start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 114 when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command instructing the variation start from the main control device 110. .. The display control device 114 starts the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display variation start command from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation start command processing, first, the restart display data table corresponding to the restart effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2826). Next, the Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233b and its contents are cleared (S2827).

Next, the time data corresponding to the restart effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2828), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2829). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to off, the demo display flag is set to off, and the confirmation display flag is set to off (S2830), and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this way, the display control device 114 receives the display fluctuation start command, and first displays the restart effect on the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the main control device 110 determines the start of the variation effect, immediately after the start of the variation effect, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol to swing up and down. As a result, the variation effect by the third symbol is started.

On the other hand, after transmitting the display variation start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. Upon receiving these display variation pattern commands, the display control device 114 starts executing the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, and starts high-speed variation of the third symbol. As a result, it is possible to pretend to the player that the variation effect of the third symbol is started at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Therefore, since the player can be made to think that the fluctuation effect is started in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, the player can be made to play the game while matching the rhythm of the BGM.

When the start of the variable effect is determined by the main control device 110 by setting the demo display flag and the final display flag to off by the process of S2830, the demo display and the final display effect being displayed are replaced. Therefore, the variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If both the confirmation command and the display fluctuation start command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination processing, the above-mentioned confirmation command processing (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is executed. Is set to on, but then this fluctuation start command processing (S2711) is executed, and the confirmation command flag is turned off by the processing of S2830.

Returning to FIG. 35, when it is determined that there is no display variation start command in the processing of S2710 (S2710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation pattern command (S2712: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2713), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2713) will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (b). FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a detailed variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is extracted (S2831). Next, the extracted display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2832).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2832, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time Set the table in the display data table buffer 233a.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233a, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control. When instructed by the device 110, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is given from the main control device 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table. ) Will be received, and the changing third symbol will be suddenly stopped and displayed, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233a as in the present embodiment, it is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having the variation time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233a is completed, the confirmation command from the main control device 110 is completed. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received, the player visually recognizes the restart effect as a part of the variable effect. , The change of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 can be continued without discomfort until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed.

Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233b (S2833). Next, the time data representing the time for which the display is controlled by the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2832 is set in the time counter 233e (S2834). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to off (S2836). Then, the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2835 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2832 is executed. From, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233e in which the variation time data is set by the process of S2834, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been completed, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received. Further, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is not received after the variation effect is completed, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, at the timing of the beat of the BGM, the variation effect is apparently stopped and displayed, and this apparent display is based on the variation display data table of the BGM. This is realized by defining the fluctuation display data table for a time shorter than the original fluctuation time so that the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat. In the present embodiment, after the stop display of the apparent fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation table display data table, the restart effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81 until the original definite display timing is reached. Is displayed on the screen to secure the original fluctuation time. As a result, the player can be made to think that the fluctuation effect is stopped according to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game while matching the rhythm of the BGM.

Also, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is prioritized, the display variation Since the variation effect associated with the pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command judgment process, the presence or absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so that the confirmation command processing, which is the process corresponding to the display confirmation command, is always executed first, while the display is displayed. The process corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and the confirmation command flag set by the confirmation command for display can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S2836. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, it is for display. Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command judgment process, the presence or absence of the display demo command is determined first, so that the demo command process, which is the process corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first, while the display is displayed. The process corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display demo command is rewritten to the variation display data table by overwriting as in the process of S2832. Can be done. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, both the display variation start command and the display variation pattern command may be stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands. This is a case where the timing of the fluctuation start determined by the main control device 110 and the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced are aligned. In this case, if the process corresponding to the display variation start command is prioritized, the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command is not performed, but is performed until the restart effect associated with the display variation start command is confirmed and displayed. It ends up.

On the other hand, in this command judgment process, the presence or absence of the display variation start command is determined first, so the demo command process, which is the process corresponding to the display variation start command, is always executed first. , The process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and the variation display data table is overwritten by the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display variation start command as in the process of S2832. Can be rewritten as. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display variation start command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 35, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the processing of S2712 (S2712: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a stop type command for display (S2714: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2715), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2715) will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, one of the stop type information (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front-back off reach, reach other than front-back loss, complete miss, and special stop symbol) indicated by the display stop type command. ) Is determined (S2841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 34 (b)) is executed. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2842).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2842 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it to off (S2843) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, the processing of S2842 is performed as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time. Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2604), after the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2842 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2843, and the identification thereof is performed. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified.

Since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, the display stop type command for two or more is not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2841 to prepare for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S2842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even if it is completely out of order.

Here, if the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually off. , The player misunderstands that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become a big hit, and there is a risk that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be lowered. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in fact, if it is a big hit, the completely disengaged stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the process of S2714 (S2714: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2722), and the process of S2701 is executed. Return to.

In the processing of S2701 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes). ), The processing of S2702 to S2722 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2701 to S2722 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2701 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area (S2701: No). ), Ends this command judgment process.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIGS. 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2901), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2901: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S2902 to S2904 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2905. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S2901: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S2902), S2903. Each process of S2904 executes the process corresponding to the new command.

In the process of S2903, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S2903), and if the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S2903: Yes), it is for display in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the hold ball count command has been processed, and the hold image setting process is executed (S2904).

Here, the details of the reserved image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In this hold image setting process, the third symbol display device 81 displays the hold ball number symbols corresponding to the number of hold balls notified from the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the processing of the hold ball number command for display. Therefore, it is a process for expanding the image data.

In the hold image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag for which ON is set is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). ) Is expanded (S2951). In the task processing, based on this expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the reserved image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

In the hold image setting process, after the process of S2951, the new hold ball count command is set to off (S2952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 39, after the hold image setting process (S2904) or in the process of S2903, when it is determined that the new hold ball number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2903: No), then , S2905.

In S2905, the pointer update process is executed (S2905). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process updates the pointer 233c that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing contents should be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, respectively. It is a process to perform.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S2981). That is, in principle, the pointer 233c is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233c by the process of S2981, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c is End information. Is determined (S2982). As a result, if it is End information (S2982: Yes), it means that the pointer 233c has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is a demo display data table or a restart display data table (S2983), and the demo display data table or restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2983: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S2984), and further corresponds to the effect time of the demo display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is set in the time counting counter 233e (S2985), and the process proceeds to S2987. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demo effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2983, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither the demo display data table nor the restart display data table (S2983: No), the pointer 233c is used. The value is subtracted by 1 (S2986), and the process proceeds to S2987. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a variable display data table or a definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, , Since the drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is described is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 is made to display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

As a result of the processing of S2982, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, when it is determined that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233c after the update by the processing of S2981 is not End information (S2982: No. ), The processing of S2983 to S2986 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S2987.

In the process of S2987, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2987), and if the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S2987: No), the pointer update process is terminated and the display is set. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2987: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, and thus the display data table buffer. In the display data buffer set in 233a, the value of the pointer 233c is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored (S2988), and the value of the clock counter is set to 1. (S2989), the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

Returning to FIG. 39, after the pointer update process (S2905), the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process is shown from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The drawing content of the address is expanded (S2906). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S2906 together with the previously expanded reserved image, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Whenever the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, the Null data will be expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233e is subtracted by 1 (S2911), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233e after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2912). If the value of the timekeeping counter 233e is 1 or more (S2912: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233e is 0 or less (S2912: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2913, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2913).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2913: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, first stop. The mode of the definite display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol discrimination flag is determined, the definite display data table of the mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and the Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are cleared (S2914). Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the confirmation display is set in the time counter 233e (S2915), and the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2916). Then, after the confirmation command flag is set to off (S2917) and then the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S2918), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is used as it is in the work RAM 233. It is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in (S2919), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a confirmation command (display confirmation) is given from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the final symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2919 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variation effect starts from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, the variation based on the data table starts in the variation display data table. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the elapse of a predetermined time is specified. In the task process (S2604), the stop symbol in the previous variation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S2919 until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation. Then, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information specified in the above-mentioned variable display data table to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on in the processing of S2913 (S2913: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2920 shown in FIG. 40, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2920). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2920: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. Later (S2921), the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2922), and then the time data corresponding to the effect time of the data display is set in the time counter 233e (S2923). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2924), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S2925), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demo effect command indicating the start of the demo effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, the display automatically. The drawing content can be set so that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The branching condition of S2920: Yes is satisfied when the definite display effect is performed. In this case, the content of the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared by the processing of S2914. Therefore, in the process of S2922, the process of clearing those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

In the process of S2920, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2920: No), then it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S2926). If the demo display flag is on (S2926: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is, and V Return to the interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2926, when the demo display flag is not on but off (S2926: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the variation effect is completed. Therefore, the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S2929). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2930), the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2931), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation table display data table is defined for a time shorter than the original fluctuation time so that the fluctuation effect is apparently stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM by the fluctuation display data table. do. Then, after the apparent stop display is performed, the restart display data table is set by the process of S2929, so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original confirmed display timing is reached, and the original Secure the fluctuation time. As a result, the player can be made to think that the fluctuation effect is stopped according to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game while matching the rhythm of the BGM.

Further, in the display control device 114, a confirmation command (confirmed command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect ( When the display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, the restart effect is an effect of displaying the image obtained by vibrating the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. By visually recognizing that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the change of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol has not been determined at that time.

After the last drawing content specified by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the pointer update process described above. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in a mode of vibrating (oscillating) the third symbol around a predetermined position, and in the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary for displaying by swinging at least once are specified. Then, by repeatedly expanding the drawing contents from the beginning of the restart display data table, the restart effect of repeatedly vibrating the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by setting the restart effect to cause the third symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the third symbol, the restart display data table is caused to swing the third symbol at least once. Since it is only necessary to store the drawing contents required for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be kept small.

Further, if a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2914 shown in FIG. 39 is performed and the display data table buffer is performed. A definite display data table is set in 233a. As a result, even during the restart effect, the stop display of the third symbol is made with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the confirmation display effect is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed on.

Further, if a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2832 in FIG. 37 (b) is performed and displayed. A variation display data table is set in the data table buffer 233a, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, if a display demo command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2821 in FIG. 36 (c) is performed and the display data is displayed. A display data table for demo is set in the table buffer 233a, and the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The restart effect is displayed when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110, which should be originally received, is not received after the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variation effect. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, malfunction, etc., there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received even while the restart effect is displayed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a display variation pattern command or a display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2605), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 (S3001). That is, in the processing of S3001, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2604). Then, the specified address is associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as the drawing information (detailed information).

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S3002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 to expand the drawn image. When the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the drawn image to be expanded in the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag after the processing of S3002 (S3003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and to "0" if it is "1". Will be. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 34 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame, and the image is drawn. When the processing and display processing are executed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is specified. The first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. .. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are alternately designated as the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer, respectively, every 20 milliseconds. This makes it possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, when the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (starting winning) is detected, the player is notified that the ball has been entered. The incoming ball sound is output according to the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated, an operation sound for notifying the player that the operation has been performed is output according to the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat.

As a result, the incoming ball sound and the operation sound are pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically according to the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Further, when the entry sound or the operation sound is pronounced, the pitch of the entry sound or the operation sound is determined by using the constituent sound or the elapsed sound of the BGM chord (chord) at the pronunciation timing. As a result, not only the incoming ball sound and the operation sound are sounded according to the beat of the BGM, but also the pitch is sounded according to the chord of the BGM at that time. Therefore, a melody accompanied by BGM can be composed of a ball entry sound and an operation sound, and can be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the operation, and the number of entering balls and the number of operations. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the incoming ball sound and the operation sound from time to time.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol to vibrate up and down from the original timing of the start of fluctuation to the timing of the beat of the BGM. (Design shaking period). Then, when the timing of the first BGM beat arrives from the original fluctuation start timing, the reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern determined for the fluctuation effect is started at that timing, and the first 3 The symbol display device 81 starts high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol.

Here, a display pattern is set in advance so that the display of various effect images during the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. In addition, the output from the audio output device 226 and the lighting / blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 according to the display of the effect image are specified in the data table, and these are also specified in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Will be done.

Further, in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM shortly before the original definite display is performed, and the stop display is performed. The stop sound to be represented is produced by the voice output device 226. After that, the third symbol display device 81 vibrates the third symbol up and down until the original confirmed display timing is reached (symbol shaking period), and the third symbol is confirmed and displayed at the original confirmed display timing.

As described above, the fluctuation effect is originally started and definitely displayed regardless of the beat of the BGM, but in the present embodiment, high-speed fluctuation is started in accordance with the timing of the beat, and once. Display the stop. Then, from the original fluctuation start timing to the start of high-speed fluctuation, and from the time when the stop display is performed to the original confirmed display timing, the display that vibrates the third symbol up and down is displayed as the symbol shaking period. conduct.

As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is started in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and the player can be shown as if the stop display was performed. In addition, various effect images displayed during the variation effect can be displayed according to the beat of the BGM, and further, the sound output according to the variation effect, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the first The operation of one accessory 87 can also be performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling that the variable effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the timing of changing the BGM, for example, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM output when the big hit is notified and the BGM for the big hit effect output at the time of the big hit effect. Once the BGM is changed at the timing of starting or ending the playback of the BGM, the BGM continues to play regardless of the start and stop of the variation effect, and the appearance of the variation effect starts (start of high-speed fluctuation) or the appearance of the variation effect. The case where the stop display (temporary stop of the third symbol) is executed at the timing of the beat of the BGM has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the case where the reproduction of the BGM is started at the start of the variation effect and the reproduction of the BGM ends at the end of the variation effect will be described.

In the second embodiment, the sound reproduction start information and the sound reproduction end information of the BGM corresponding to the variation effect are defined in the data table set when the detailed variation pattern is determined. Specifically, the sound reproduction start information of the BGM is defined in the first address (0001H) of the data table. Further, the sound reproduction end information of the BGM is specified in the data table in association with the address corresponding to the time when the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern ends. Further, at the address where the sound reproduction end information of the BGM is specified, the sound reproduction start information of the stop sound indicating that the stop display of the variation effect is displayed is also specified.

By referring to this data table, the MPU 221 starts the reproduction of the BGM at the start of the variation effect, ends the reproduction of the BGM at the end of the variation effect, and sounds the stop sound of the variation effect at the same time. Will be done.

Here, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation time is defined so that the fluctuation effect ends at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Therefore, the variation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat, and the stop sound of the variation effect is also pronounced at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the fluctuation effect is stopped in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, since the variable effect can be rhythmically terminated, the fun of the game can be enhanced.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the variation display process (S1913), the sound editing / output process (S1909), the start winning sound output process (S2133), and the frame button operation executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a part of the on-output processing is different. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, other various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and display. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 44, the variation display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the variation display process (S1913).

In this variation display process, first, as in the first embodiment, after the processes of S2101 to S2104 are executed, the display control device 114 is notified of the detailed variation pattern determined in the process of S2104. A variation pattern command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3501). Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol acquired by the process of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3502).

Here, the set display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1902) executed thereafter in the main process (see FIG. 24). Will be done.

That is, in the first embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated at the timing when the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are received are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113. Instead, it is temporarily saved in RAM 223, and instead, a display fluctuation start command is sent to the display control device 113 to start the restart effect to start the variation effect, and then for display at the timing of the BGM beat. By sending the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command for display to the display control device 113 and starting the high-speed fluctuation of the fluctuation effect, the variation effect is apparently started at the timing of the beat of the BGM. In the embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated at the timing when the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are received are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113 to produce the variation effect. Start high-speed fluctuation of.

After the processing of S3502, the same processing of S2107 and S2108 as in the first embodiment is performed, and then a data table determined by the processing of S2104 and corresponding to a detailed fluctuation pattern is set (S3503). Then, the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S3504), and the variation display process is terminated.

As a result, the MPU 221 sequentially counts up the pointer 223g initialized by the processing of S3504, and collects various control information defined by the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the data table set by the processing of S3403 in the data table. Read from the storage area 222b, and according to the control information, the voice output from the voice output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory). Drive of the rotary motor 87e) is controlled.

Here, the reading of various control information from the data table is performed in the sound editing / output processing (see FIG. 45) at the timing of the beat of the BGM, as in the first embodiment. Therefore, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM, so that the player can play the game rhythmically. Can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as described above, the BGM sound reproduction start information is defined in the first address (0001H) of the data table, and the BGM sound reproduction end information corresponds to the address corresponding to the time when the variation effect by the detailed variation pattern ends. Attached and specified in the data table. Further, at the address where the sound reproduction end information of the BGM is specified, the sound reproduction start information of the stop sound indicating that the stop display of the variation effect is displayed is also specified. By referring to this data table, the MPU 221 starts the reproduction of the BGM at the start of the variation effect, ends the reproduction of the BGM at the end of the variation effect, and sounds the stop sound of the variation effect at the same time. Will be done. Here, in the second embodiment, since the variable time is defined so that the variable effect ends at the timing of the beat of the BGM, the variable effect ends at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the variable effect is stopped. The sound is also pronounced at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the fluctuation effect is stopped in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, since the variable effect can be rhythmically terminated, the fun of the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the sound editing / output processing (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the sound editing / output processing (S1908).

In this sound editing / output processing, first, it is determined whether or not the pointer 223g is 0 (S3511). Then, if the pointer 233g is not 0 (S3511: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat cycle T of the BGM being reproduced (S2121). As described above in the description of the first embodiment, the timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the period T of the beats of the BGM being reproduced. As a result of the processing of S2121, when the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat period T (S2121: Yes), it is determined that the timing of the beat has come in the BGM being played, and the process proceeds to the processing of S2128, and the pointer is set to 223g. 1 is added (S2128), and the control information specified at the address indicated by the added pointer 223g is read out in the set data table (S2129). Then, after that, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

As a result, at the timing of the beat of the BGM being played, the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed according to various control information specified in the data table. Is controlled.

If it is determined that the pointer 233g is 0 as a result of the processing of S3531 (S3531: Yes), it is immediately after the data table is set by the MPU221, so the determination processing of S2121 is skipped and S2128 as it is. Move to the processing of. That is, since the BGM reproduction is not started immediately after the data table is set, it is not possible to determine the timing of the BGM beat by the determination process of S2121. Therefore, when the pointer 233g is 0, the process proceeds to S2128 as it is, and the audio output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device are according to various control information defined in the first address (0001H) of the data table. The lighting / blinking of 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

Here, the data table is set by the MPU 221, for example, at the timing when the variation effect is started. Therefore, at the same time as the start of the variation effect, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the start winning sound output process (S2122) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the start winning sound output process (S2122).

In this start winning sound output process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer 223g is 1. (S3521). Then, if the value of the pointer 223g is not 1 (S3521: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2151, and thereafter, the same process as that of the first embodiment is executed.

As a result, when a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) is detected, the ball entry sound that notifies the player that there is a ball entry is matched with the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat. And output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically according to the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

In addition, when the incoming note is pronounced, the pitch of the incoming note is determined using the constituent tones and elapsed notes of the BGM chord (chord) at the timing of the pronunciation. The player can hear the melody accompanied by BGM by the incoming sound that is pronounced at the matching pitch. Moreover, since the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the number of entering balls, the player can be entertained by various melody played by the incoming ball sound from time to time.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S3512 that the value of the pointer 223g is 1 (S3512: Yes), the value of the pointer 223g is changed from 0 to 1 by S2128 of the sound editing / output processing (see FIG. 45). Since it means that the processing is performed immediately after the count-up, that is, the processing is executed for the first time after the detailed fluctuation pattern is determined and the data table is newly set accordingly, the start winning counter 223d Is set to 0 (S3521) to end the start winning sound output process. As a result, the number of balls entered into the first starting port 64 after the variation effect based on the determined detailed variation pattern is started can be counted by the start winning counter 223d. Therefore, the sound of the ball entering the first starting port 64 after the variation effect is started can be output from the voice output device 226.

In the sound editing / output processing (see FIG. 45), the frame button operation sound output processing (S2137) executed when an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is performed is the first embodiment. Similarly, the details are almost the same as the start winning sound output process. That is, the frame button operation sound output process is obtained by replacing the start prize counter 223d used in the start prize sound output process with the frame button operation count counter 223f and replacing the sound to be pronounced from the prize sound to the operation sound. By executing the frame button operation sound output processing, it is possible to exert the same action and effect as the winning sound output by the starting winning sound output processing in the operating sound.

In particular, since the operation sound is pronounced in accordance with the beat of the BGM, a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as rhythmically operating the frame button 22 according to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can exert the same action and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 59. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the voice output from the voice output device 226 by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the effect determined based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. A case of determining and controlling the lighting / blinking mode of the lamp display device 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 (driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e) will be described. bottom.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified in the display control device 114, and the specified display content is controlled by the voice lamp from the display control device 114. Notify device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 controls the voice output from the voice output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 according to the display content notified from the display control device 114.

Along with this, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the beat cycle (T) of the BGM, whereas in the third embodiment, the display control is performed. The device 114 counts the BGM beat cycle (T), and the display control device 114 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223.

The difference between the RAM 223 in the third embodiment and the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 9) is that a one-beat flag 223l and a back-beat flag 223m are provided instead of the timer counter 223h. .. In the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 does not count the beat cycle (T) of the BGM, so that the timer counter 223h is unnecessary.

The one-beat flag 223l is a flag indicating that it is the timing of the BGM beat, and when it is on, it indicates that it is the timing of the BGM beat, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not the timing of the BGM beat. Further, the back beat flag 223m is a flag indicating that it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM, and when it is on, it indicates that it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM, and when it is off, it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM. Indicates that there is no such thing.

Both the one-beat flag 223l and the back-beat flag 223m are "off" in the initial value setting process (S1810) of the RAM executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Is set. Here, the display control device 114 transmits a beat command indicating that it is the timing of the beat at the timing of the beat of the BGM to the voice lamp control device 113, and at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, the back beat command is transmitted. A beat command indicating that it is the timing of the beat is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

The MPU 221 sets the one-beat flag 223l to ON when it receives a beat command indicating that it is the timing of the BGM beat from the display control device 114. Further, when a beat command indicating that it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM is received from the display control device 114, the back beat flag 223m is set to ON.

The one-beat flag 223l is referred to in the sound editing / output processing (see FIGS. 56 and 57), and when the beat flag 223l is on, it is regarded as the timing of the BGM beat, and is the same as S2128 to the first embodiment. The process of S2133 is executed.

By processing S2128 to S2133 at the timing of the BGM beat, various control information is read from the data table at the timing of the BGM beat, and according to the various read control information, at the timing of the BGM beat. The audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, the reproduction of the sound can be started and stopped at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Further, the lamp is based on various control information read out by the lamp editing process (S1909) of the main process (FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 and the first accessory editing drive process (S1910). The lighting / blinking of the display device 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

As a result, in the pachinko machine 10, the voice output, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, the reproduction of the sound can be started and stopped at the timing of the beat of the BGM, so that the player can play the rhythmic game.

The data table used in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is provided for each effect determined by the voice lamp control device 113 according to a command or the like from the main control device 110. On the other hand, the data table used by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is provided one by one for all the display contents notified from the display control device 114.

Further, the one-beat flag 223l is referred to in the start winning sound output processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output processing, and when the beat flag 223l is on, it is assumed that it is the timing of the BGM beat. , The processes of S2156 to S2168 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Further, the back beat flag 223m is also referred to in the start winning sound output processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output processing, and when the back beat flag 223m is on, at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. If there is, the processing of S2170 to S2179 is executed as in the first embodiment.

As a result, the incoming ball sound and the operation sound are pronounced in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically according to the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Further, when the entry sound or the operation sound is pronounced, the pitch of the entry sound or the operation sound is determined by using the constituent sound or the elapsed sound of the BGM chord (chord) at the pronunciation timing. As a result, not only the incoming ball sound and the operation sound are sounded in accordance with the BGM beat and the back beat, but also the pitch is sounded in accordance with the BGM chord at that time. Therefore, a melody accompanied by BGM can be composed of a ball entry sound and an operation sound, and can be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the operation, and the number of entering balls and the number of operations. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the incoming ball sound and the operation sound from time to time.

The one-beat flag 223l and the back-beat flag 223m include the start winning sound output processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output processing in the sound editing / output processing (see FIGS. 56 and 57). , After the processing of referring to these flags is performed, all of them are set to off (S4002 and S4003 in FIG. 57).

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 in the third embodiment differs from the display control device 114 in the first embodiment in that the work RAM 233 is provided with a timer counter 233f and is stored in the display data table storage area 232a. The contents specified in the displayed data table are partially different.

The timer counter 233f is a counter for counting the beat cycle of the BGM by the display control device 114. The MPU 231 uses the timer counter 233f to determine the timing of the beat and the back beat of the BGM being reproduced. In the MPU 231, in the display setting process (S2603), based on the command newly received from the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined whether or not the BGM is changed, and when it is determined that the BGM is changed, the BGM is changed. A BGM playback start command including information on the changed BGM type is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to start playback of a new BGM, and the timer counter 233f is set to 1. Initialize (S3611 to S3614 in FIG. 51).

Further, the tempo of all the BGMs to be reproduced is stored in the program ROM 232, and the MPU 231 reads the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced from the program ROM 232 and calculates the beat cycle T from the tempo. S3613 in FIG. 51).

After that, the timer counter 233f is incremented by 1 in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds. However, when the value of the timer counter 233f matches the beat cycle T, "1" is set instead of adding 1. As a result, the timer counter 233f counts the beat cycle of the BGM.

When the value of the timer counter 233f is T, the MPU 231 assumes that it is the timing of the BGM beat, and transmits a beat command indicating that it is the timing of the BGM beat to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 grasps the timing of the BGM beat by receiving the beat command indicating that it is the timing of the BGM beat. Further, the MPU 231 determines that the timing of the back beat of the BGM is the timing of the back beat of the BGM when the value of the timer counter 233f is T / 2, and issues a beat command indicating to the voice lamp control device 113 that the timing of the back beat of the BGM is. Send. The voice lamp control device 113 grasps the timing of the back beat of the BGM by receiving the beat command indicating that it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226, lights / blinks the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 (the first accessory up / down motor 87a and the first accessory) at the timing of the BGM beat. 1 Drive of the accessory rotation motor 87e) is controlled. As a result, the voice output, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed according to the rhythm of the BGM.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 has a ball entry sound for notifying that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 and an operation to the frame button 22 at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat. Controls to produce an operation sound to notify that. Therefore, since the entry sound and the operation sound are produced at the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat, the player can hear the entry sound and the operation sound that match the rhythm of the BGM.

Since the display control device 114 updates the value of the timer counter 223f every 20 milliseconds, the BGM beat cycle can be counted only at intervals of 20 milliseconds. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the tempo of the BGM is set so that the cycle of the beat of the BGM is a multiple of 20 milliseconds. That is, the tempo of the BGM is determined by the display control device 114 based on the update interval of the value of the timer counter 223f. For example, when the V interrupt process is executed every 30 milliseconds, the value of the timer counter 223f is also updated every 30 milliseconds. Therefore, the tempo of the BGM is determined so that the cycle of the beat of the BGM is a multiple of 30 milliseconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the display data table stored in the display data table storage area 232a of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables.

The difference between the display data table in the third embodiment and the display data table in the first embodiment is that, in addition to the drawing contents, the display contents of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at some addresses are to be displayed. Is the point that regulates. For example, when displaying high-speed fluctuations in a fluctuation effect, it is defined as "high-speed fluctuation display" as the display content, and when displaying a girl character image, it is defined as "girl character display" as the display content, and a light emitting effect is specified. When displaying an image, it is defined as "light emission effect display" as the display content.

The displayed contents are also included in the additional data table. That is, in the additional data table that regulates the display of the image to be additionally displayed with respect to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table, the display content is defined for some addresses.

The display contents specified in the display data table and the additional data table are used to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the display content is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 223c in the display data table or the additional data table, the MPU 231 issues a display type command including information indicating the display content to the voice lamp control device 113. And send.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the display type command from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content indicated by the display type command from the voice output device 226, and lights / blinks the lamp display device 227. The first accessory 87 is controlled to operate. Thereby, the sound can be easily output from the sound output device 226 according to the display content, the lamp display device 227 can be turned on / blinking, or the first accessory 87 can be operated.

Here, in the display data table and the additional data table, a new image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is deleted, or the image is changed according to the timing of the beat of the BGM. It defines the drawing content and also the display content. Therefore, the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are also started to be executed in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM. Then, as described above, in the voice lamp control device 113, the voice output from the voice output device 226 whose execution is started, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM. Controls the behavior of. Therefore, the image display on the third symbol display device 81, the voice output from the voice output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp control device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM. , The player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2713), which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern command processing.

In the variation pattern command processing in the third embodiment, after the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is extracted by the processing of S2831, the detailed variation pattern flag corresponding to the extracted detailed variation pattern is turned on. It is set, and the detailed fluctuation pattern flag corresponding to the other detailed fluctuation patterns is set to off (S3601). Here, the detailed variation pattern flag is a flag provided for all the detailed variation patterns, and indicates that the variation effect is performed by the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the detailed variation pattern flag turned on.

Next, the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3602). Then, after clearing the contents by writing the Null data to the additional data table buffer 233b (S2833), the restart effect specified by the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S3602 is performed. The time data representing the time is set in the time counting counter 233e (S3603). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to off (S2836). Then, the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S3602 while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S2835. From, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified.

That is, when the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 first executes a restart effect (an effect in which the third symbol moves up and down) on the third symbol display device. Then, when the timing of the BGM beat is reached, the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the detailed variation pattern flag set to be turned on by the processing of S3601 is started, and the high-speed variation of the third symbol is first performed. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the variation display data table, which is a display data table for executing the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern, the variation effect of the third symbol is apparently stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM. It looks as if it were. Specifically, for this fake display, the fluctuation table display data table is displayed for a time shorter than the original fluctuation time so that the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM by the fluctuation display data table. It is realized by specifying. In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, after that, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original fixed display timing is reached, and the original fluctuation time is secured. As a result, the player can be made to think that the fluctuation effect is stopped according to the rhythm of the BGM.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player appear as if the variable effect is started and stopped in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Therefore, it is possible to put the player on the rhythm of the BGM and enjoy the variable effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the display determination process (S2603) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

In the display determination process in the third embodiment, when the new command flag is on and it is determined that a new command has been determined in the previous command determination process (S2901: Yes), after the hold image setting process (S2904). Or, in the process of S2903, if it is determined that the new reserved ball count command flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S2903: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the BGM change timing (S3611). .. Whether or not the BGM is changed is determined based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, based on the command, the timing to start the reproduction of the BGM output when the jackpot is notified and the jackpot effect is notified, the timing to start or end the reproduction of the jackpot effect BGM output at the time of the jackpot effect, and the like. If it is determined, it is determined as the BGM change timing.

Then, when it is determined that it is the BGM change timing (S3611: Yes), a BGM playback start command including information on the changed BGM type is generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S3612). .. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 starts playing the BGM of the type included in the BGM playback start command, and the voice output device 226 outputs the BGM.

Next, the tempo of the type of BGM at which reproduction is started is read from the program ROM 232, the cycle T of the beat of the BGM is calculated, and stored in the work RAM 233 (S3613). Further, the timer counter 233f is initialized to 1 (S3614). By updating the timer counter 233f while counting up in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds and counting up to the BGM beat cycle T calculated in the process of S3613, the MPU 231 is a timer. The counter 233f can be used to grasp the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced.

As a result of the processing of S2901 it is determined that the new command flag is off (S2901: No), as a result of the processing of S3611 it is determined that it is not the BGM change timing (S3611: No), or S3614. After the process of S3615, the process proceeds to the process of S3615. In the process of S3615, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the period T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S3615). As a result, when the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the period T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S3615: Yes), it is the timing of the beat of the BGM. Set (S3616).

The beat command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next. By receiving this beat command, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the beat of the BGM. Since the beat command is transmitted at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next time, the transmission is permitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed. The display setting process executed in the V interrupt process includes a command determination process before that, and is not always executed at intervals of 20 milliseconds, and there is a slight deviation. Therefore, the beat command is not generated accurately at intervals of 20 milliseconds. Therefore, if the generated beat command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 as it is, the BGM beat grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is recorded. There is a risk that the intervals will shift. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the beat command is permitted to be transmitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, the beat interval of the BGM grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is accurately maintained. Can be given.

Next, it is determined whether or not the detailed variation pattern flag is set by the process of S3601 of the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 50) (S3617). Then, if the detailed variation pattern flag is set (S3617: Yes), the detailed variation pattern setting process is executed (S3618).

Here, the details of the detailed fluctuation pattern setting process (S3618) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. This detailed variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation display data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern in the display data table buffer 233a and executing a variation effect based on the detailed variation pattern.

In this detailed variation pattern setting process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern for which the detailed variation pattern flag is set to be turned on is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3631). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233b (S3632).

Next, the time data representing the time for which the display is controlled by the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S3631 is set in the time counter 233e (S3633). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S3634), and the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, the confirmation display flag, and all the detailed fluctuation pattern flags are all set to off (S3635). After that, the process returns to the display setting process.

As a result, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S3631, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S3631 is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233c. The defined drawing contents are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified. Therefore, according to the variation display data table set by the process of S3631, the variation effect based on the detailed variation pattern can be executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Here, when the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 does not immediately execute the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, but once. , Perform a restart effect. Then, at the timing of the beat of the BGM, the detailed variation pattern setting process is executed, and the execution of the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is started. Specifically, the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, in the variation display data table, which is a display data table for executing the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern, the variation effect of the third symbol is apparently the variation effect at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Is displayed as if it was stopped. As a result, the player can be made to think that the fluctuation effect is stopped according to the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, the variable effect can be started and stopped by the player according to the beat of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the variable effect by putting it on the rhythm of the BGM. can.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After executing the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) or when it is determined by the process of S3617 that the detailed variation pattern flag is not set (S3617: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is set to 1. (S3619). As a result, the timer counter 233f again starts counting the period T of the beat of the BGM. Then, the process proceeds to S2905.

As a result of the processing of S3615, when the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to the cycle T of the BGM beat (S3615: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the cycle of the BGM beat (T / 2). It is determined whether or not (S3620). When the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half of the BGM beat cycle (T / 2) (S3620: Yes), it is the BGM back beat timing, so that it is the BGM back beat timing. The indicated beat command is set (S3621).

The beat command set here is also transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next, in the same manner as the beat command indicating that it is the timing of the beat. The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the back beat of the BGM by the beat command indicating that it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The reason for transmitting the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next is the timing of the beat of the BGM. This is the same as the reason for transmitting the beat command indicating the above to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next. That is, by permitting the transmission of the beat command at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, it is possible to accurately maintain the interval between the BGM beats and the back beats grasped by the voice lamp control device 113. can.

If it is determined that the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to half of the BGM beat cycle (T / 2) after the processing of S3621 or by the processing of S3620 (S3620: No), the processing of S3622 is performed. After the transition, 1 is added to the value of the timer counter 233f to update the timer counter 233f (S3622). Then, the process proceeds to S2905.

In the process of S2905, the same pointer update process as that of the first embodiment is executed (S2905). After that, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b (S3623). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3623 together with the previously expanded reserved image, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Whenever the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, the Null data will be expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

In the process of S3623, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. When the content (see FIG. 49) is specified, a display type command for notifying the display content to the voice lamp control device 113 is generated, and the generated display type command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content notified by this display type command from the voice output device 226, lights and blinks the lamp display device 227, and controls the operation of the first accessory 87. Will be done.

Here, as described above, in the display data table and the additional data table, the drawing contents are defined and combined so that the image is newly displayed, changed, or deleted at the timing of the beat of the BGM. The display contents are specified. That is, the display content is defined in association with the address that is the timing of the BGM beat, and the display type command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of the BGM beat.

As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, the reproduction of the voice according to the display content, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are started at the timing of the beat of the BGM. In this way, since the sound output according to the display content and the start of driving the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

After the process of S3623, the process proceeds to the process of S2911 which is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thereafter, the same process as that of the first embodiment is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the main processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the main process.

The main process in the third embodiment is different from the main process in the first embodiment in that the display command determination process (S3701) is executed after the command determination process (S1914). In this display command determination process (S3701), processing is performed according to the command received from the display control device 114.

Here, the details of this display command determination process (S3701) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a display command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device 113. The command received from the display control device 114 is temporarily stored in the display control command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223.

In the display command determination process, first, from the display control command storage area, the first command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and whether the display type command is received from the display control device 110. Whether or not it is determined (S3801). Then, when it is determined that the display type command has been received (S3801: Yes), the display content (display type) to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is extracted from the received display type command (S3802). Then, the data table corresponding to the display content is read from ROM 222 and set (S3803), the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S3804), and the display command determination process is terminated.

As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 reproduces the voice according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 according to the data table set by the process of S3803, and outputs the voice from the voice output device 226. Further, according to the data table, the lamp display device 227 is controlled to be turned on and blinked, and further, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e are used to operate the first accessory 87. Control to drive.

Here, as described above, the display type command is a command transmitted from the display control device 114 at the timing of the beat of the BGM being played. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the reproduction of the voice corresponding to the display content indicated by the display type command, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 at the timing of the beat of the BGM. You can start from.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the display type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S3801 (S3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the BGM playback start command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3808). .. As a result, when it is determined that the BGM reproduction start command has been received (S3808: Yes), the reproduction start command of the type of BGM specified by the BGM reproduction start command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S3809). As a result, the reproduction of the designated BGM is started, and the sound output device 226 outputs the sound.

Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM for which playback is started is a time-saving BGM (S3810), and if it is a time-saving BGM (S3810: Yes), the time-saving BGM playback flag 223c is set to ON (S3811), and the time-saving BGM is set to ON. If it is not for BGM (S3810: No), the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to off (S3812). As a result, while the time-saving BGM is being played as the BGM, the incoming sound for notifying the incoming ball to the first incoming ball port 64 is generated by the processing of S2134 and S2135 (see FIG. 56) of the sound editing / output processing. The start winning sound output process, which is reproduced at the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM, is executed. When the processing of S3811 or S3812 is completed, the display command determination processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the BGM reproduction start command has not been received as a result of the processing of S3808 (S3808: No), it is then determined whether or not the beat command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3813). Then, when it is determined that the beat command has been received (S3813: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the beat command indicates that it is the timing of the BGM beat (S3814).

As a result, if it is a beat command indicating that it is the timing of the BGM beat (S3814: Yes), the one-beat flag 223l is set to ON (S3815), and the display command determination process is terminated. As a result, the MPU 221 controls based on the turned-on one-beat flag 223l while determining that it is the timing of the BGM beat.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S3814 is not a beat command indicating that it is the timing of the BGM beat (S3814: No), the beat command confirmed to be received by the processing of S3813 indicates the timing of the back beat of the BGM. Since it is a beat command, the back beat flag 223m is set to ON (S3816), and the display command determination process is terminated. As a result, the MPU 221 controls based on the turned on back beat flag 223m while determining that it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM.

When it is determined that the beat command has not been received as a result of the processing of S3813 (S3813: No), then it is determined whether or not another command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3817). If no other command has been received (S3817: No), the display command determination process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command is received (S3817: Yes), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S3818), the display command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

By value, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the variation display process (S1913) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S1913).

In this variation display process, first, as in the first embodiment, after the processes of S2101 to S2104 are executed, the display control device 114 is notified of the detailed variation pattern determined in the process of S2104. A variation pattern command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3501). Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol acquired by the process of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3502).

Here, the set display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1902) executed thereafter in the main process (see FIG. 24). Will be done.

That is, in the first embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated at the timing when the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are received are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113. Instead, it is temporarily saved in RAM 223, and instead, a display fluctuation start command is sent to the display control device 113 to start the restart effect to start the variation effect, and then for display at the timing of the BGM beat. By transmitting the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command for display to the display control device 113 and starting the high-speed fluctuation of the fluctuation effect, the variation effect is apparently started at the timing of the beat of the BGM. In the embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated at the timing when the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are received are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the restart effect is first executed, and the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is set at the timing of the beat of the BGM being played. Based on this, the variable effect is executed.

After the processing of S3502, the same processing of S2107 and S2108 as in the first embodiment is performed, and the variation display processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, the details of the sound editing / output processing (S1908) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing this sound editing / output processing (S1908).

In the sound editing / output processing in the third embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the one-beat flag 223l is on (S4001). Then, when the one-shot flag 223l is off (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S2134, while when the one-shot flag 223l is on (S4001: Yes), it is the timing of the beat of the BGM being played. The same processes of S2128 to S2133 as in the first embodiment are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2134. That is, at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the set data table is read while sequentially counting up the pointer 223g, and if there is sound reproduction start information, there is. A reproduction start command including information on the sound for starting reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301, and if there is sound reproduction stop information, a reproduction stop command including information on the sound for stopping reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301.

That is, various control information is read from the data table at the timing of the BGM beat, and according to the various read control information, the voice output from the voice output device 226 and the lighting of the lamp display device 227 are performed at the timing of the BGM beat. -Blinking, the operation of the first accessory 87 is controlled. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, the reproduction of the sound can be started and stopped at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Further, the lamp is based on various control information read out by the lamp editing process (S1909) of the main process (FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 and the first accessory editing drive process (S1910). The lighting / blinking of the display device 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

As a result, in the pachinko machine 10, the voice output, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, the reproduction of the sound can be started and stopped at the timing of the beat of the BGM, so that the player can play the rhythmic game.

The processes of S2134 to S2137 and the processes of S2138 to S2141 shown in FIG. 57 are the same processes as those of the first embodiment. Then, after the processing of S2141 is completed, or as a result of the processing of S2140, when it is determined that there is end information of the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: No), in the third embodiment, The process proceeds to S4002, and the one-beat flag 223l is set to off (S4002). Further, the back beat flag 223m is set to off (S4003), and the sound editing / output processing is completed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, the details of the start winning sound output process (S2135) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. 58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the start winning sound output process (S2135).

The start winning sound output process in the third embodiment is different from the start winning sound output process in the first embodiment, except that the determination of whether or not the timing of the beat and the back beat of the BGM being played is different. It is the same as the start winning sound output processing in the first embodiment. Specifically, the process of S4101 is executed instead of the process of S2155 in the first embodiment, and it is determined whether or not the one-beat flag 223l is on, so that whether or not it is the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced is determined. Judgment (S4101). Then, if the one-beat flag 223l is on (S4101: Yes), it is the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, so the same processing of S215 to S2168 as in the first embodiment is executed.

On the other hand, if the one-beat flag 223l is off as a result of the processing of S4101 (S4101: No), the processing of S4102 shown in FIG. 49 is executed instead of the processing of S2169 of the first embodiment. That is, by determining whether or not the back beat flag 223m is on, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM being reproduced (S4102).

If the back beat flag 223m is on (S4102: Yes), it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM being reproduced, so the same processing of S2170 to S2179 as in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, if the back beat flag 223m is off as a result of the processing of S4102 (S4102: No), the start winning sound output processing is terminated.

In the start winning sound output process in the third embodiment, the processes of S2151 to S2154 are also the same processes as in the first embodiment.

Therefore, by executing the start winning sound output process in the third embodiment, the MPU 221 can exert the same effect as the start winning sound output process in the first embodiment.

Further, the details of the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) in the third embodiment are almost the same as those in the start winning sound output process in the third embodiment, and specifically, they are used in the start winning sound output process. The start winning counter 223d is replaced with the frame button operation count counter 223f, and the sound to be pronounced is replaced from the winning sound to the operation sound, which is the frame button operation sound output processing. Therefore, by executing the frame button operation sound output process in the third embodiment, the MPU 221 can exert the same operation and effect as the frame button operation sound output process in the first embodiment.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the display control device 114 counts the cycle of the BGM beat during reproduction, detects the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat, and detects the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat, and the voice lamp. Notify the control device 113. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 controls so that the voice is reproduced, the lamp display device 227 is lit / blinked, and the first accessory 87 is operated at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat. As a result, the same effect as that of the first embodiment is obtained.

That is, when the ball entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is detected, the ball entering sound for notifying the player that the ball has been entered is matched with the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat. Output. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated, an operation sound for notifying the player that the operation has been performed is output according to the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat.

As a result, the incoming ball sound and the operation sound are pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically according to the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Further, when the entry sound or the operation sound is pronounced, the pitch of the entry sound or the operation sound is determined by using the constituent sound or the elapsed sound of the BGM chord (chord) at the pronunciation timing. As a result, not only the incoming ball sound and the operation sound are sounded according to the beat of the BGM, but also the pitch is sounded according to the chord of the BGM at that time. Therefore, a melody accompanied by BGM can be composed of a ball entry sound and an operation sound, and can be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the operation, and the number of entering balls and the number of operations. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the incoming ball sound and the operation sound from time to time.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol to vibrate up and down from the original timing of the start of fluctuation to the timing of the beat of the BGM. (Design shaking period). Then, when the timing of the first BGM beat arrives from the original fluctuation start timing, the reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern determined for the fluctuation effect is started at that timing, and the first 3 The symbol display device 81 starts high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol.

Here, a display pattern is set in advance so that the display of various effect images during the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. In addition, the output from the audio output device 226 and the lighting / blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 according to the display of the effect image are specified in the data table, and these are also specified in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Will be done.

Further, in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM shortly before the original definite display is performed, and the stop display is performed. The stop sound to be represented is produced by the voice output device 226. After that, until the original confirmed display timing is reached, the third symbol display device 81 performs a display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down (symbol shaking period), and the third symbol is confirmed and displayed at the original confirmed display timing.

As described above, the fluctuation effect is originally started and definitely displayed regardless of the beat of the BGM, but in the present embodiment, high-speed fluctuation is started in accordance with the timing of the beat, and once. Display the stop. Then, from the original fluctuation start timing to the start of high-speed fluctuation, and from the time when the stop display is performed to the original confirmed display timing, the display that vibrates the third symbol up and down is displayed as the symbol shaking period. conduct.

As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is started in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and the player can be shown as if the stop display was performed. In addition, various effect images displayed during the variation effect can be displayed according to the beat of the BGM, and further, the sound output according to the variation effect, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the first The operation of one accessory 87 can also be performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling that the variable effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same function and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the corresponding embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Can be done.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment described above, similarly to the first embodiment, the timing of changing the BGM, for example, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM output when the jackpot is notified and the jackpot effect Once the BGM is changed at the timing of starting or ending the playback of the jackpot effect BGM that is sometimes output, the BGM continues to play regardless of the start and stop of the variable effect, and the appearance of the variable effect starts (high speed). The case where the start of fluctuation) and the fake stop display (temporary stop of the third symbol) are executed at the timing of the beat of the BGM has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the reproduction of the BGM is started at the start of the variation effect, and the reproduction of the BGM ends at the end of the variation effect, as in the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment specifies the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114, and displays the specified display content from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device. Notifying the 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display content notified from the display control device 114, and therefore, the voice output from the voice output device 226, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the first role. It is common with the third embodiment in that the operation of the object 87 is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 counts the BGM beat cycle (T), and the display control device 114 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat. Common to the form.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the third embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 60, the details of the display setting process (S2603) executed by the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the display setting process (S2603).

In the display setting process in the fourth embodiment, the processes S3611 to S14 and the processes S3615 to S3622 executed in the display setting process in the third embodiment are not executed. Further, after the pointer update process (S2905) is executed, the processes of S4201 to S4210 are executed instead of the process of S3624. As for the other processes in the fourth embodiment, the same processes as the display setting processes in the third embodiment are executed.

First, in the process of S4201, the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process (S2905) is drawn from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. Expand the content (S4201). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3623 together with the previously expanded reserved image, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Whenever the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, the Null data will be expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

In the process of S4201, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. When the content (see FIG. 49) is specified, a display type command for notifying the display content to the voice lamp control device 113 is generated, and the generated display type command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content notified by this display type command from the voice output device 226, lights and blinks the lamp display device 227, and controls the operation of the first accessory 87. Will be done.

Here, when the fluctuation display data table is set, the high-speed fluctuation display is specified as the display content at the first address (0001H), and the MPU 231 refers to the voice lamp control device 113 according to the display content. , Sends a display type command that shows the high-speed variation display of the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table. Upon receiving the display type command, the voice lamp control device 113 starts playing the BGM corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern indicated by the display type command. That is, the reproduction of the BGM is started at the start of the variable effect.

Further, in the variation display data table, a stop display is specified as a display content at the last address corresponding to the end time of the variation effect, and according to this, the MPU 231 displays a stop display to the voice lamp control device 113. Send the display type command shown. Upon receiving the display type command, the voice lamp control device 113 sounds a stop sound indicating that the stop display of the variation effect has been made, and stops the reproduction of the BGM.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation time is defined so that the fluctuation effect ends at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Therefore, the variation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat, and the stop sound of the variation effect is also pronounced at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the fluctuation effect is stopped in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, since the variable effect can be rhythmically terminated, the fun of the game can be enhanced.

Further, also in the fourth embodiment, the display data table and the additional data table define the drawing contents so that the image is newly displayed, changed, or deleted at the timing of the beat of the BGM. The display contents are also specified. That is, the display content is defined in association with the address that is the timing of the BGM beat, and the display type command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of the BGM beat.

As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, the reproduction of the voice according to the display content, the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are started at the timing of the beat of the BGM. In this way, since the sound output according to the display content and the start of driving the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

After the processing of S4201, it is determined whether or not it is the BGM change timing (S4202). As the BGM change timing, for example, in addition to the above-mentioned start timing of the variable effect, the timing of starting the display indicating that the jackpot has been achieved, the timing of starting the jackpot effect, and the display indicating the end of the jackpot effect are started. There is timing and so on. These timings are determined based on the display contents specified in the set display data table and the additional data table.

As a result of the processing of S4202, when it is determined that it is the BGM change timing (S4202: Yes), the tempo of the type of BGM at which playback is started is read from the program ROM 232, and the beat cycle T of the BGM is calculated. , Stored in the work RAM 233 (S4203). Further, the timer counter 233f is initialized to 1 (S4204). By updating the timer counter 233f while counting up in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds and counting up to the BGM beat cycle T calculated in the process of S4203, the MPU 231 is a timer. The counter 233f can be used to grasp the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced.

If it is determined that it is not the GM change timing after the processing of S4204 or as a result of the processing of S4202 (S4202: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the period T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. It is determined whether or not (S4205). As a result, when the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the period T of the beat of the BGM being played (S4205: Yes), it is the timing of the beat of the BGM. Set (S4206).

The beat command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next. By receiving this beat command, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the beat of the BGM. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 makes the ball entry sound for notifying the entry into the first ball entry sound 64, the operation sound for notifying that the frame button 22 is operated, and the like at the timing of the beat of the BGM. Can be pronounced.

Since the beat command is transmitted at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next time, the transmission is permitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed. The display setting process executed in the V interrupt process includes a command determination process before that, and is not always executed at intervals of 20 milliseconds, and there is a slight deviation. Therefore, the beat command is not generated accurately at intervals of 20 milliseconds. Therefore, if the generated beat command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 as it is, the BGM beat grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is recorded. There is a risk that the intervals will shift. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the beat command is permitted to be transmitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, the beat interval of the BGM grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is accurately maintained. Can be given.

Next, the value of the timer counter 233f is set to 1 (S4607). As a result, the timer counter 233f again starts counting the period T of the beat of the BGM. Then, the process proceeds to S2911.

As a result of the processing of S4205, when the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to the cycle T of the BGM beat (S4205: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the cycle of the BGM beat (T / 2). It is determined whether or not (S4208). When the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half of the BGM beat cycle (T / 2) (S4208: Yes), it is the BGM back beat timing, so that it is the BGM back beat timing. The indicated beat command is set (S4209). Therefore, the incoming ball sound, the operation sound, and the like can be pronounced by the voice lamp control device 113 not only by using the timing of the BGM beat but also by using the timing of the back beat.

The beat command set here is also transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next, in the same manner as the beat command indicating that it is the timing of the beat. The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the back beat of the BGM by the beat command indicating that it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The reason for transmitting the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next is the timing of the beat of the BGM. This is the same reason as the reason for transmitting the beat command indicating the above to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next. That is, by permitting the transmission of the beat command at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, it is possible to accurately maintain the interval between the BGM beats and the back beats grasped by the voice lamp control device 113. can.

If it is determined that the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to half of the BGM beat cycle (T / 2) after the processing of S4209 or by the processing of S4208 (S4208: No), then the timer counter The timer counter 233f is updated by adding 1 to the value of 233f (S4210). Then, the process proceeds to S2911.

From the above, also in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the ball entering the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) is detected while the time-saving BGM is being reproduced as the BGM, the ball is entered. It is possible to output the incoming ball sound that notifies the player of the fact in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat. In addition, an operation sound for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has been operated is output according to the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat while the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed. can do. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically according to the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

In addition, when a ball entry sound or operation sound is produced, the pitch of the ball entry sound or operation sound is determined using the constituent sounds and elapsed sounds of the BGM chord (chord) at the sound generation timing. The player can hear the melody accompanied by the BGM by the incoming ball sound or the operation sound produced at the pitch matching the BGM chord. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball, the number of entering balls, or the timing of the operation of the frame button 22 and the number of operations. The melody can entertain the player.

In particular, since the operation sound is pronounced in accordance with the beat of the BGM, a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as rhythmically operating the frame button 22 according to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment can exert the same action and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the corresponding embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. ..

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. In the first to fourth embodiments, after sounding an entry sound or an operation sound having a chord constituent sound as the pitch of a certain BGM beat, the elapsed sound of the same chord is sounded at the timing of the subsequent back beat of the BGM. Elapsed time in the back beat when a high entry sound or operation sound is produced, and then an entry sound or operation sound with the same chord constituent sound as the pitch is produced at the timing of the next BGM beat. About the case where the pitch of the sound and the constituent sound in the next beat is specified in association with the pitch of the constituent sound in the first beat by the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c (see FIG. 6). explained.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the pitch of the elapsed sound in the back beat and the pitch of the constituent sound in the next beat in such a case are set to the key of the BGM being reproduced (the main key of the entire BGM) and the current pitch. It is calculated by calculation from the BGM chord and the pitch of the first beat.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted. Needless to say, the invention realized in place of the first embodiment in the fifth embodiment can be applied to the pachinko machines 10 of the second to fourth embodiments.

61 and 62 describe the details of the start winning sound output process (S2122) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing the start winning sound output process (S2122).

The difference between the start winning sound output process in the fifth embodiment and the start winning sound output process in the first embodiment is that when the elapsed sound is output as the winning sound at the timing of the back beat of the BGM (S2172: Yes). , The point where the process of S4402 (see FIG. 62) is executed instead of the process of S2174 (see FIG. 30) of the first embodiment, and when the winning sound is output at the timing of the beat of BGM, the back beat immediately before is output. If the elapsed sound is sounded (S2160: Yes), the process of S4401 (see FIG. 61) is executed instead of the process of S2164 (see FIG. 29). Other processes (S2151 to S2163, S2165 to S2173, S2175 to 2179) executed in the start winning sound output process are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In the processing of S4402 (FIG. 62), the pitch of the winning sound reproduced in the previous beat read from the pitch information memory 223k by the processing of S2173 executed immediately before, the key of the BGM being reproduced, and the key of the BGM being reproduced are used. From the current BGM chord, the pitch of the winning note whose pitch is the elapsed note of the chord is calculated (S4402).

For example, in the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the main note of the key (“C” in this example) matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and the previous beat. If the pitch of the winning note played in is the same as the root note of the current chord (completely 1 degree) (“do” in the above example), the pitch of the winning note (passing note) to be pronounced in the back beat. , Calculates a pitch that is two degrees higher than the root note of the chord (“re” in the above example).

In the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the main note of the key (“C” in this example) matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and the note is played at the previous beat. If the pitch of the winning note is 3 degrees higher than the root note of the current chord (“mi” in the above example), the pitch of the winning note (passing note) to be pronounced in the back beat is the root of the chord. The pitch of 4 degrees completely (“fa” in the above example) is calculated from the sound.

In the currently playing BGM key (eg, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the main note of the key (“C” in this example), and the previous beat. If the pitch of the winning note played in step 1 matches the root note of the current chord (completely 1 degree) (“fa” in the above example), the pitch of the winning note (passing note) produced by the back beat. , Calculates a pitch that is two degrees higher than the root note of the chord (“so” in the above example).

Also, in the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the main note of the key (“C” in this example), and is before. If the pitch of the winning note played at the beat of is 3 degrees higher than the root note of the current chord (“la” in the above example), the pitch of the winning note (passing note) produced at the back beat is , Calculates a pitch that is 4 degrees higher than the root note of the chord (“shi” in the above example).

Similar to the process of S4402 (FIG. 62), the process of S4401 (FIG. 61) is the same as the process of S4402 (FIG. 62). And, from the BGM key being played and the current BGM chord, the pitch of the winning sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is calculated (S4401).

For example, in the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the main note of the key (“C” in this example) matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and the previous beat. If the pitch of the winning note played in is the same as the root note of the current chord (completely 1 degree) (“do” in the above example), the pitch of the winning note (constituent note) produced by the current beat. As a result, a pitch that is 3 degrees higher (“mi” in the above example) is calculated from the root note of the chord. In other words, in this case, the winning note with the root note of the current chord as the pitch is sounded in the previous beat, and the winning note with a pitch two times higher than the root note of the current chord is pronounced in the back beat immediately before. , The winning note with a pitch three times higher than the root note of the current chord is played at the current beat (in the above example, the winning notes are played in the order of "do", "re", and "mi").

In the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the main note of the key (“C” in this example) matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and the note is played at the previous beat. If the pitch of the winning note is 3 degrees higher than the root note of the current chord (“mi” in the above example), the pitch of the winning note (constituent note) to be produced at the current beat is the chord. A complete 5 degree pitch (“so” in the above example) is calculated from the root note. In other words, in this case, the winning note with a pitch 3 degrees higher than the root note of the current chord is produced in the previous beat, and the winning note with a pitch completely 4 degrees higher than the root note of the current chord is produced in the back beat immediately before. It is pronounced, and the winning note with a pitch that is completely 5 degrees higher than the root note of the current chord is played at the current beat (in the above example, the winning notes are played in the order of "mi", "fa", and "so". ).

In the currently playing BGM key (eg, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the main note of the key (“C” in this example), and the previous beat. If the pitch of the winning note played in is the same as the root note of the current chord (completely 1 degree) (“fa” in the above example), the pitch of the winning note (constituent note) produced by the current beat. As a result, a pitch 3 degrees higher (“la” in the above example) is calculated from the root note of the chord. In other words, in this case, the winning note with the root note of the current chord as the pitch is played in the previous beat, and the winning note with a pitch two times higher than the root note of the current chord is played in the back beat immediately before. At the current beat, a winning note with a pitch three times higher than the root note of the current chord is played (in the above example, the winning notes are played in the order of "fa", "so", and "la").

Also, in the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the main note of the key (“C” in this example), and is before. If the pitch of the winning note played at the current beat is 3 degrees higher than the root note of the current chord (“la” in the above example), the pitch of the winning note (constituent note) produced at the current beat. As a result, a pitch that is completely 5 degrees higher (“do” in the above example) is calculated from the root note of the chord. In other words, in this case, the winning note with a pitch that is 3 degrees higher than the root note of the current chord is produced in the previous beat, and the winning note with a pitch that is 4 degrees higher than the root note of the current chord is produced in the back beat immediately before. It is pronounced, and the winning note with a pitch that is completely 5 degrees higher than the root note of the current chord is played at the current beat (in the above example, the winning notes are played in the order of "la", "shi", and "do". ).

In this way, from the pitch of the winning note played in the previous beat, the key of the BGM being played, and the current BGM chord, the pitch of the winning note with the elapsed note of the chord as the pitch is calculated. It is possible to calculate the pitch (scale) of each note that composes the scale, only the pitch of the main note changes according to the key, which is determined according to the key set for BGM. This is because the height relationship) is always constant.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the same chord is produced at the timing of the back beat of the BGM after the entry sound or the operation sound having the constituent sound of the chord as the pitch is produced at the beat of a certain BGM. When an incoming ball or operation sound with the elapsed sound of the same chord as the pitch is produced, and then an incoming sound or operation sound with the same chord constituent sound as the pitch is produced at the timing of the next BGM beat. The pitch of the elapsed note in the back beat and the pitch of the constituent notes in the next beat are calculated from the key of the BGM being played, the current BGM chord, and the pitch of the first beat. It is possible to eliminate the need for the elapsed sound reproduction sound height setting table 222c provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the pitch of the constituent notes in the first beat, the elapsed notes in the back beat, and the pitches of the constituent notes in the next beat are used for each chord that can be taken by the BGM. Since it is not necessary to store them in association with each other, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity required for the program ROM 222.

Also in the fifth embodiment, the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) executed when the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the sound editing / output process (see FIG. 27). The details of the above are almost the same as those of the start winning sound output process (see FIGS. 61 and 62). Specifically, the start winning sound counter 223d used in the starting winning sound output processing is replaced with the frame button operation count counter 223f, and the sound to be pronounced is replaced from the winning sound to the operation sound, which is called the frame button operation sound output processing. Become. By executing the frame button operation sound output processing, it is possible to exert the same action and effect as the winning sound output by the starting winning sound output processing in the operating sound. That is, it is necessary to store the pitch of the constituent note in the first beat, the elapsed note in the back beat, and the pitch of the constituent note in the next beat in association with each chord that can be taken by BGM. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity required for the program ROM 222.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment can exert the same action and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the corresponding embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. ..

The "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the scope of claims and the "identification information" described in each of the following gaming machines, and the "variable display" described in the above embodiment is a patent claim. Corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information" described in the range of and each of the following gaming machines.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may be added to the embodiment or exchanged with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment by adding a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment to the embodiment or exchanging the parts or a plurality of parts thereof. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in each of the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, when a ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 while the time-saving BGM is being played as the BGM, the prize is stocked and a prize sound for notifying the prize is emitted. The case of pronouncing at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat for time saving has been explained, but the pronunciation at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat of this winning sound is not necessarily limited to the time when the beat of the BGM for time saving is being played. The winning sound may be pronounced at the timing of the beat of the BGM, the back beat, or the like for any BGM. As a result, the winning sound is pronounced in accordance with the beat of the BGM, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically according to the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feelings for the game can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

In addition, if a ball wins a prize in the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a while the jackpot production is being performed, the winning prize is stocked and the winning sound for notifying the winning is generated by the jackpot production BGM. It may be pronounced at the timing of the beat or the back beat. As a result, the joy of getting a lot of prize balls by winning a ball in the special prize opening 65a during the jackpot production period is further enhanced by the winning sound pronounced according to the rhythm of BGM, and the player is enhanced. You can be more satisfied. Further, by changing the pitch of the winning sound by the method described in each of the above embodiments, a melody matching the chord progression of the jackpot effect BGM can be played by the winning sound. Therefore, this melody can further enhance the satisfaction of the player.

In each of the above embodiments, when the ball is continuously entered into the first entry port 64, or when the frame button 22 is continuously operated, the entry is stocked at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The number of balls or the number of operations is 2 or more, there is a sound of an incoming ball or an operation sound at the timing of the immediately preceding beat, and the BGM chord at the timing of the back beat of the BGM and the timing of the beat of the BGM immediately after that. The case where the incoming ball sound or the operation sound having the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch is produced is described on the condition that the chord of the BGM in the above is matched. Then, the input sound or operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord sounded at the timing of the back beat of the BGM is the input sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord sounded at the timing of the beat of the immediately preceding BGM. By sandwiching the ball sound or operation sound with the ball entry sound or operation sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord pronounced at the timing of the BGM beat immediately after, the melody played by the ball entry sound or operation sound can be produced. The case of giving the player an impression of being in line with the BGM code has been described. On the other hand, when the ball is continuously entered into the first entry port 64, or when the frame button 22 is continuously operated, the number of incoming balls stocked at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. Or, if the number of operations is 2 or more and there is a sound of an incoming ball or an operation sound at the timing of the immediately preceding beat, the BGM chord at the timing of the back beat of the BGM and the BGM at the timing of the beat of the immediately following BGM. Regardless of whether or not the chords match the chords of, the incoming sound or the operation sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch may be produced at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. In this case, the pitch of the incoming ball or operation sound that is produced at the timing of the BGM beat immediately after is the pitch at the previous beat (previous beat) from the constituent tones of the BGM chord at that timing. If you select a pitch along the scale set according to the BGM key, based on the chord constituent notes in) and the pitch at the timing of the back beat (the elapsed note of the chord at that time). good. As a result, the elapsed sound of the chord at that time is selected as the pitch of the incoming ball or the operation sound, and even if the chord is changed at the timing of the immediately preceding beat, a melody that does not feel strange along the chord progression of the BGM is produced. , Can be played by the incoming ball sound or the operation sound.

In each of the above embodiments, when the ball is continuously entered into the first entry port 64, or when the frame button 22 is continuously operated, not only the timing of the BGM beat but also the BGM The case of pronouncing a ball entry sound or an operation sound was described using the timing of the back beat. On the other hand, further, not only the BGM beat and the back beat, but also the entry sound and the operation sound may be produced at the timing of 1/4 of the BGM beat. As a result, a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the ball entry sound and the operation sound, so that the player can be more entertained by the ball entry sound and the operation sound.

In each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a winning sound immediate reproduction effect is prepared for the pronunciation of the entry sound when the time-saving BGM is being reproduced has been described. That is, as a warning effect suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is high, in the variable effect, the winning sound is not output at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the time-saving BGM, but is entered into the first entrance 64. The case of preparing an effect of outputting a ball entry sound at a predetermined pitch without waiting for the timing of the beat or the back beat of the time-saving BGM when there is a ball has been described. As a notice effect suggesting that the expectation of becoming a big hit is high, the winning sound deviation may be prepared in addition to the winning sound immediate reproduction effect, or instead of the winning sound immediate reproduction effect. That is, when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the entry sound is produced by slightly shifting the timing of the beat or back beat of the time-saving BGM, for example, by shifting by 1/10 of the beat cycle. You may prepare a production to do. By making the player feel uncomfortable by producing the incoming ball sound at a timing different from the timing of the beat or the back beat of the time-saving BGM, it may shift to a special game state of a big hit. You can have a strong sense of expectation.

Further, for each of the above embodiments, an operation sound immediate reproduction effect or an operation sound deviation effect may be prepared for the operation sound. That is, when the operation button 22 is operated while the effect requiring the operation button 22 is being performed, the operation button 22 is operated instead of producing the operation sound at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat. When it is done, an effect of immediately producing an operation sound may be provided. Alternatively, when the operation button 22 is operated while the effect requiring the operation button 22 is being performed, the operation sound is slightly shifted from the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, for example, 1 / of the beat cycle. An effect of producing an operation sound may be provided by shifting by 10. The player who operates the frame button 22 thinks that the operation sound is produced at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, but the operation sound is immediately produced when the frame button 22 is operated. Or, by making the operation sound deviate from the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat, it is possible to have a strong expectation that it will shift to a special game state of big hit, and the frame button. It is possible to make the operation of 22 more enjoyable.

In addition, the above-mentioned immediate reproduction effect of the winning sound, the effect of shifting the winning sound from the timing of the beat or the back beat of the time-saving BGM, or the above-mentioned operation sound immediate reproduction effect or operation sound deviation effect may be varied. It may be executed as one aspect of the so-called continuous advance notice effect which is continuously executed over the effect. For example, when the first random number counter C1 acquired with a certain start winning as a trigger indicates a big hit, the above-mentioned winning sound immediate reproduction effect is applied to all the pending variable effects at that time. Alternatively, the winning sound may be produced by shifting the timing of the beat or the back beat of the time-saving BGM, or the operation sound immediate reproduction effect or the operation sound deviation effect may be executed. As a result, when there is a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or when the frame button 22 is operated across a plurality of variable effects, the timing of the beat or back beat of the time-saving BGM is not waited for. In addition, it is possible to output a ball entry sound or an operation sound at a predetermined pitch, or to make the winning sound or the operation sound deviate from the timing of the beat or the back beat of the time-saving BGM. It is possible to make the player hear more sounds and operation sounds, and to make the player recognize the many variations of the game.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning sound or operation sound generated at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat is stored, and when a big hit occurs, the stored winning sound or operation sound is reproduced during the big hit production. You may try to do it. This makes it possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority to the jackpot while listening to the reproduced winning sound and the melody of the operation sound. Further, when the player operates the frame button 22 after the game is completed, the QR code (registered trademark) including the stored winning sound and operation sound information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can display the QR code (registered trademark). The QR code may be photographed with a camera-equipped mobile phone so that it can be registered in a predetermined server. Then, when a player plays a game on a pachinko machine of the same model, by inputting the password obtained from the predetermined server into the pachinko machine, a big hit is generated for the winning sound and the operation sound registered in the server. You may be able to play it when you do. As a result, by listening to the melody of the winning sound or the operation sound played in the past, the player's sense of superiority to the jackpot can be enhanced. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the winning sound or the operating sound is sounded at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, the pitch of the winning sound or the operating sound to be pronounced is determined according to the BGM code, or The function of determining the pitch of the winning sound or the operation sound by using the elapsed sound of the chord may be executed only when the password obtained from the above-mentioned predetermined server is input to the pachinko machine. .. As a result, such a function can be provided only to a specific player, so that the player's interest can be enhanced by giving the special effect of the production.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display hold ball number command to the display control device 114 without delay when the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is updated has been described. , In the voice lamp control device 113, the information that the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated is stocked, and the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a after the update is displayed and controlled at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM. A display reserved ball count command for notifying the device 114 may be transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the updated reserved ball number in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM. That is, since the addition / disappearance of the reserved ball number symbols is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, it is possible to make the player perform a rhythmic game.

In addition, when the incoming ball sound is produced at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, at least while the incoming ball sound is produced at such a timing, the incoming ball sound is produced at the timing at that time. A display hold ball count command indicating the value of the hold ball count counter 223a may be transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the updated number of reserved balls is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 together with the sound of the incoming ball, so that the player can play a more rhythmic game. Can be done.

Further, in the third and fourth embodiments, when the display lamp control device 114 receives the display hold ball number command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display lamp control device 114 is indicated by the display hold ball number command without delay. The case where the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the display lamp control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command from the voice lamp control device 113. If this is the case, the third symbol is the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command, waiting for the timing of the beat or back beat of the playing BGM managed by the display control device 114. It may be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the display device 81. As a result, the addition / disappearance of the reserved ball number symbols is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

In the second and fourth embodiments, the case where the variation time of the variation effect is set according to the cycle of the beat of the BGM and the variation effect is terminated at the timing of the beat of the BGM has been described. On the other hand, the variation time of the variation effect is set regardless of the cycle of the BGM beat, and the variation effect is apparently stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the BGM beat immediately before the end of the variation effect. After that, the display may be performed by swinging the third symbol up and down until the original stop display timing is reached. As a result, it is possible to show the player that the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is completed at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the player is given the impression that the variation effect is performed according to the rhythm of the BGM. be able to. In this case, the stop sound of the third symbol is also pronounced at the timing of the beat of the BGM immediately before the end of the variation effect, when the variation effect is apparently stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. May be good. As a result, it is possible to give the player a stronger impression that the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed at the timing of the beat of the BGM.

In the first and third embodiments, the case where the BGM is started to be reproduced from the beginning when the BGM is changed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the time-saving BGM is being reproduced. When the BGM for the reach is played back, the BGM for the time saving is muted and continues to be played in the mute state, and after the reach is completed, the BGM for the time saving is stopped together with the BGM for the time saving. By canceling the mute of, the output of the time-saving BGM may be resumed. In this case, since the time-saving BGM continues to be played while the reach BGM is being played, the timer counter 223h that counts the beat timing of the BGM counts even while the time-saving BGM is muted. You need to keep doing it. As a result, even if the reach BGM is reproduced during the time-saving BGM reproduction, the timing of the beat and the back beat of the time-saving BGM can be accurately determined. Further, when a reach occurs during the reproduction of the time-saving BGM and the reproduction of the reach BGM is performed, the reproduction of the time-saving BGM is paused, and after the reach is completed, the reproduction of the reach BGM is stopped. , The pause of the time-saving BGM may be canceled, and the reproduction may be resumed from the place where the pause was made. In this case, the timer counter 223h that counts the beat timing of the BGM needs to be held even while the time saving BGM is temporarily stopped. As a result, even if the reach BGM is reproduced during the time-saving BGM reproduction, the timing of the beat and the back beat of the time-saving BGM can be accurately determined.

In the first and third embodiments, when the reproduction of the BGM is started after the end of the big hit, the reproduction of the BGM may be started at the same time as the start of the variation effect. In this case, the variation time of the variation effect and the time during which the variation effect provided between each variation effect when the variation effect is continuously performed are not executed so as to be a multiple of the beat cycle of the BGM. May be set to. As a result, at least until the number of holdings of the variable effect becomes 0, the variable effect starts and ends at the timing of the beat of the BGM, so that the player can be provided with a rhythmic game that matches the rhythm of the BGM.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which one first entry slot 64, in which a big hit lottery is started when a ball enters, is arranged in the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Rather, a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first ball entry port, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 313 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the reserved ball number counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entry ports are provided, the first ball entry port is provided with a blade member that expands / contracts (or opens / closes), and the blade member is expanded (or opened). It may be in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter when it is in the state), and when the blade member is in the contracted state (or closed state), it is difficult for the ball to enter (or it cannot enter). .. At this time, the blade member may be configured to be more likely to be expanded than when the ventilation state is in the normal state when the gaming state is in the probable change state or the time saving state in one first ball entry port. On the other hand, the other first ball entry port may be in a state in which the ball is always easy to enter without the blade member. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery that accompanies the entry into the first ball entrance is a jackpot, the result of the jackpot lottery that is associated with the entry into the other first entry opening is the jackpot. It may be configured so that a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player (for example, a 15R probability variable jackpot) can be more easily selected than in the case of. When the pachinko machine has these configurations, if the game state is the normal state, the ball is put into another first entrance, and the ball is given to the player so that a lot of big hit lottery is performed. When the ball is fired and the game state is in the probable change state or the normal state, the ball is made to enter the first ball entry port where the blade member tends to be in the enlarged state, so that a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player can be obtained. You can make the player shoot a ball. Therefore, it is possible to give a variation to the way of playing by the player, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, the variable effect reserved in response to the ball entry into one first ball entry port is the entry into the other first ball entry port. It may be executed in preference to the variable effect reserved in response to. In particular, when a big hit is obtained as a result of a big hit lottery performed when a ball enters one of the first entrances, a big hit of a type advantageous to the player (for example, a 15R probability variable big hit) can be easily selected. When configured, the variable effect that is reserved in response to the entry into the first entrance of the first ball is preferentially executed, so that the player is given an advantageous type of jackpot. It can be easily given. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be increased.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entry ports are provided, the ball entry sound may be pronounced when there is a ball entry to all the first ball entry ports. At this time, regardless of which first ball entry port the ball has entered, if there is a ball entry, the entry sound may be produced at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat for each entry. Since the incoming ball sound is pronounced at the timing of many BGM beats or back beats, the player can hear a melody that does not have a delay. On the other hand, the timing of sounding the incoming ball sound when there is an incoming ball may be controlled for each first incoming ball opening. That is, in this case, if there are balls entering the plurality of first entry openings at substantially the same time, the entry sound for each first entry opening is sounded at the timing of the same BGM beat or back beat. Then, at this time, the pitch of each incoming note may be determined to produce a chord that matches the BGM chord at that time. As a result, the player can enjoy the sound of music, so that a more enjoyable game can be provided.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, the ball entry sound may be produced only when the ball enters the one first ball entry port described above. If this one first entrance is configured so that, for example, a type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player (for example, a 15R probability variation jackpot) can be easily selected, each time the entry sound is pronounced. In addition, the player can easily know that there was a ball in the first entrance, which makes it easy to select a type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and the expectation for the game can be increased. .. In addition, since the incoming ball sound is pronounced at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, the expectation can be raised according to the incoming ball sound sounded according to the rhythm of the BGM, and the player can play the game rhythmically. Can be enjoyed. In particular, in the present embodiment, the sound of the ball entry sound is produced when the game state is in the time saving state, but the first ball entry port is in the time saving state and is easier to enter than in the normal state. If so, the player is in a state of strongly wanting to know whether or not the ball has entered the first entrance of the first ball when the time is shortened. Under such circumstances, while the time-saving BGM is being played, the player can play the one by making the entry sound sound only when the entry is made at the first entry opening of the first entry. It is possible to know that there was an entry in the first entrance of the ball by the entry sound pronounced at the pitch corresponding to the chord of the time reduction BGM in accordance with the rhythm of the time reduction BGM. Therefore, the player can increase the expectation for the game while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM. Further, in this case, if the variable effect held in response to the entry into the first entry port is preferentially executed, the entry into the first entry opening is performed. Since the corresponding fluctuation effect is consumed more and more, it is unlikely that the number of reserved balls becomes full and the balls that have entered the first entrance of the first ball are not held and become invalid. In the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the ball entry sound is sounded as if there was a ball entry, and the ball entry sound is sounded to the first ball entry port that was not held. The incoming ball sound is not pronounced for the incoming ball. On the other hand, by making the entry sound sound for the entry into the first entrance, which is executed with priority given to the variation effect, the reserved variation effect continues to be digested, so that a new one It is easy to suspend the entry of the ball into the first entry port, so that a large number of entry sounds for the entry into the first entry opening can be pronounced. Therefore, it is possible to continuously perform the pronunciation by the incoming ball sound, and it is possible to entertain the player. On the contrary, the variable effect for entering the other first ball entry port is held until all the variable effect for entering the first ball entry port is executed. Therefore, the other first ball entry port is held. The variable effect held for the mouth immediately reaches the maximum number of held balls, and the hold does not decrease from there. Therefore, even if the entry sound for the other first entry opening is sounded, there is entry in the other first entry opening while the fluctuation effect for the maximum number of reserved balls continues to be reserved. However, since the incoming ball sound is not pronounced, the player is given the impression that the melody due to the incoming ball sound is interrupted. On the other hand, if the ball enters the first ball entrance only when the ball enters the ball, the sound of entering the ball can be prevented from occurring.

In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, it is configured to sound the ball entry sound as if there was a ball entry. That is, the entry sound is not sounded for the entry into the first entry port 64 that was not held. On the other hand, when the main control device 110 detects that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 regardless of whether or not the ball has been suspended. A command to be notified may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 may temporarily stock the incoming ball and sound the incoming ball sound by receiving the command. As a result, although the incoming ball is sounded even for the incoming ball for which the incoming ball is not reserved, the incoming ball is sounded for more incoming balls, so that the rhythm is more complicated. And melody can be played by the incoming ball sound that is pronounced according to the BGM. Therefore, the player can be more entertained.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the incoming ball sound and the operation sound are pronounced at the pitch matching the BGM chord in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat has been described, but instead of this, the BGM has been described. Regardless of the timing of the beat and the back beat, the BGM code at that time was matched without delay at the timing when it was detected that the ball entered the first entry port 64 or the frame button 22 was operated. The pitch may be used to produce an incoming ball sound or an operation sound. As a result, a melody accompanied by BGM can be composed of a ball entry sound and an operation sound, and can be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the operation, and the number of entering balls and the number of operations. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the incoming ball sound and the operation sound from time to time.

In each of the above embodiments, the frame rate (frame update cycle) in the third symbol display device 81 and the BGM tempo (beat cycle) are not considered. However, for example, in the above embodiment, the frame update cycle in the third symbol display device 81 is 20 milliseconds, while if the tempo of the BGM is 160 BPM, the beat cycle is 375 milliseconds, so strictly speaking. , The time of updating the frame in the third symbol display device 81 and the timing of the beat of the BGM are deviated by a maximum of 15 milliseconds. In general, the deviation between the image and the sound is not a problem if it is less than the frame update cycle. However, there may be a case where it is desired to display an image on the third symbol display device 81 accurately in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM. In this case, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the frame update timing in the third symbol display device 81, causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a predetermined effect image at a certain beat timing, and matches the timing. When the sound is produced, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the update timing of the frame that comes immediately after the timing of the beat, and the sound output LSI 301 responds to the display of the effect image. You may also instruct the pronunciation of the sound. As a result, although the timing of the beat of the original BGM is slightly deviated, it is possible to display the predetermined effect image on the third symbol display device 81 and output the sound corresponding to the display at the timing of the beat. For monitoring the frame update timing in the third symbol display device 81 in the voice lamp control device 113, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 displays the third symbol on the display control device 114 immediately after the power is turned on. After instructing the start of driving of the device 81, the display control device 114 updates the frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at intervals of 20 milliseconds based on the instruction, while the voice lamp control device 113 performs the update. It may be done by always counting 20 milliseconds from the instruction. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may receive the V interrupt signal from the display control device 114 to monitor the frame update timing in the third symbol display device 81 in the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the sound output LSI 301 may be instructed to reproduce the BGM by changing the tempo of the BGM so that the beat cycle of the BGM is a multiple of the frame update cycle in the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the tempo of the BGM is 160 BPM, the output of the BPM is instructed to the sound output LSI 301 so that the beat cycle is, for example, 380 milliseconds and the tempo of the BGM is 157.9 BPM. You may. As a result, the frame update timing in the third symbol display device 81 and the BGM beat timing can always be matched, so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 accurately in accordance with the BGM beat timing. It can be displayed. Further, if the tempo of the BGM is determined so that the BGM beat cycle is the closest value to the original BGM beat cycle among the multiples of the frame update cycle in the third symbol display device 81, the BGM Since the tempo of the music does not change significantly, the player can listen to the BGM without any discomfort.

In each of the above embodiments, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, in the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, various flags and memories provided in the RAM 223 have initial values. The case where it is set (S1810 in FIG. 23) and initialized has been described. That is, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 always starts the operation from the initial state when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and then turned on again has been described. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 determines the game state (normal state, probability change state, time saving state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 backed up by the main control device 110. , The number of reserved balls is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command, and the voice lamp control device 113 sets values in various flags and memories provided in the RAM 223 according to the command received from the main control device 110. You may do so. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice and the lamp reflecting the state backed up by the main control device 110 immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also causes the display control device 114 to output the voice and the lamp. On the other hand, it is possible to instruct the third symbol display device 81 to display an image reflecting the state backed up by the main control device 110. Therefore, for example, when a momentary power failure occurs, the sound output, the lamp output, and the image display on the third symbol display device 81 are performed from the state immediately before the power failure, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Can be continued.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation effect can be expressed, for example. , "Fluctuation start", "High-speed fluctuation", "Notice effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach", etc. A display data table is prepared for each element, and according to the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the specified elements required for the variation effect are combined into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may try to do it. In many cases, "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each image display interval (every 20 milliseconds in each of the above embodiments) for one frame at which the drawing process is completed. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. The buffers may be selected alternately, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the demo effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, the display data table has described the case where the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn is defined corresponding to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, but this is not necessarily the case. The display content is not limited to the above, and the display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second. Since one frame of image is displayed each time, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, a case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 reduces the value of the reserved ball count counter 223a by 1 when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Not. For example, in the variation processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 subtracted when the variation pattern command is set by the variation start processing (S1207) is used. Even if the hold ball number command is set so as to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. good. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of reserved balls held by the main control device 110.

In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to give a display instruction to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, by connecting a voice lamp control device to the display control device, a command to instruct the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp from the display control device, and a command to instruct the start of operation of the accessory can be issued to the voice lamp. It may be configured to transmit to the control device. At this time, the display control device determines a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the command directly received from the main control device 110, and based on the detailed fluctuation pattern, the display control device transfers the voice lamp control device to the voice lamp control device. You may send commands instructing the output of each voice, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, and the start of operation of the movable accessory. At this time, the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat is managed by the display control device, and each voice output and the lamp are output from the display control device to the voice lamp control device at the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat. You may send a command instructing the lighting / blinking of and the start of operation of the movable accessory.

Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated in place of the command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and a flag is generated based on the command. The display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display type command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a display type flag is generated, and based on the display type flag, voice output, lamp lighting / blinking, and so on. The operation of the first accessory 87 may be controlled.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 times. The number of times is not limited to, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variation effect, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example. In the slot machine, for example, the fluctuation of the symbol after the operation lever is operated is started at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the voice is sounded at the start of the fluctuation, so that the rhythm of the BGM is produced. It is possible to provide a player with a game tailored to the above. In addition, the insertion sound when a coin is inserted and the setting sound when the bet number is set by operating the bet button for setting the bet number from the coins stored in advance instead of inserting the coin. However, by making the sound sound at the timing of the beat of the BGM, it is possible to provide the player with a game that matches the rhythm of the BGM.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

A determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means are provided, and the dynamic display is executed. At least the period during which the player is playing a game in the gaming machine that gives the player a predetermined gaming value when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. An output means for outputting music to the inside, a determination means for determining the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, and an effect of executing the effect according to the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determination means. A gaming machine A1 characterized by comprising an execution means.

According to the gaming machine A1, a determination is made by the determination means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display means dynamically displays the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. To. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player a hobby. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the player is playing the game. The timing of the beat of the music output by this output means is determined by the determination means. Then, the production is executed by the production execution means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determination means. As a result, the production is performed according to the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine A1 is provided with a setting means for setting the sound of a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, and the effect executing means is set by the setting means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized by being a sounding means for producing the notification sound in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the sound of the notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is set by the setting means, triggered by the occurrence of the event caused by the progress of the game. Then, the set notification sound is pronounced by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the judging means. That is, in order to notify the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, the notification sound is sounded at least in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output during the period during which the game is being played by the player. As a result, the notification sound is pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine A2, a sound having at least a main control means for controlling a game, the output means, the determination means, and the sounding means, and controlling the sound output based on a command from the main control means. The sound control means includes a control means, the sound control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring the beat cycle of the music output by the output means, and the determination means starts the output of the music by the output means. A game characterized in that the timing of the beat of music output by the output means is determined based on the passage of time since then and the cycle of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition means. Machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means, and the sound output is controlled by the sound control means based on the command from the main control means. The sound control means has at least an output means, a determination means, and a sounding means. Here, the cycle of the beat of the music output by the output means is acquired by the acquisition means. Then, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined by the determination means based on the passage of time from the start of the output of the music by the output means and the cycle of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition means. Is judged by. Then, the notification sound set by the setting means is pronounced by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined here. In this way, the output of the music, the acquisition of the cycle of the output music beat, the determination of the timing of the output music beat, and the pronunciation of the notification sound at the timing of the music beat based on the determination. And are done in the sound control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing of the beat of the music can be accurately determined, and the notification sound can be notified accurately in accordance with the timing of the accurately determined beat of the music.

In the game machine A2, the main control means for controlling the game, the display control means for controlling the display in the display means based on the command from the main control means, the output means, the determination means, and the sounding. The display control means includes at least a sound control means for controlling a sound output based on a command from the main control means and a command from the display control means, and the display control means is the main control means. When the output start determining means for determining the start of the output of the music by the output means and the output start determining means determine the start of the output of the music by the output means based on the command from Acquisition of a transmission means for transmitting an instruction command instructing the start of music output to the sound control means and a beat cycle of the music instructed to start output by the instruction command transmitted by the transmission means. The means, the music beats output by the output means, based on the passage of time since the instruction command was transmitted by the transmission means and the music beat cycle acquired by the acquisition means. The sound control means is provided with a notification means for determining the timing and notifying the sound control means of the timing of the beat, and the determination means outputs the output based on the notification of the timing of the beat of the music by the notification means. A game machine A4 characterized in that it determines the timing of beats of music output by means.

According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means, and the display in the display means is controlled by the display control means based on the command from the main control means. Further, the sound output is controlled by the sound control means based on the command from the main control means and the command from the display control means. In the sound control means, the sound output is controlled based on the command from the display control means, so that the sound can be easily output according to the image displayed on the display means. The sound control means has at least an output means, a determination means, and a sounding means. Here, in the display control means, the start of music output by the output means is determined by the output start determination means based on the command from the main control means. When the output start determination means determines the start of music output by the output means, an instruction command instructing the start of music output is transmitted to the sound control means by the transmission means of the display control means. Further, the period of the beat of the music in which the start of output is instructed by the instruction command transmitted by the transmission means is acquired by the acquisition means of the display control means. Then, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined based on the passage of time after the instruction command is transmitted by the transmission means and the cycle of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition means. , The timing of the beat is notified to the sound control means by the notification means. In the determination means of the sound control means, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined based on the notification of the timing of the beat of the music by the notification means. Then, the notification sound set by the setting means is pronounced by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined here. In this way, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined by the display control means, and the sound control means is notified, so that the image matching the timing of the beat output by the output means is displayed in the display means. While displaying it, the notification sound can be sounded according to the timing of the beat. Therefore, it is possible to output the notification sound according to the rhythm while showing the player an image that matches the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game while putting it on the rhythm of the music output by the output means through the video and sound.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a bet number setting means for setting a predetermined game value as a bet number is provided, and the predetermined start condition is a state in which the bet number is set by the bet number setting means. It is a condition that the starting operation means that can be operated by the player is operated, and the setting means determines the bet number when the bet number is set by the bet number setting means. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that a notification sound for notifying the setting is set.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are played. That is, in a state where a predetermined game value is set as a bet number by the bet number setting means, a determination is made by the determination means on the condition that the start operation means is operated by the player as a predetermined start condition, and the identification information is identified. The dynamic display of is executed by the dynamic display execution means. At this time, when the bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the notification sound for notifying the setting of the bet number is set by the setting means. As a result, the set notification sound is pronounced by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the judgment means, that is, the fact that the bet number is set is matched with the rhythm of the music. Since it can be recognized by the notification sound that is pronounced, the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

A determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute a dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result by the determination means are provided, and dynamic display execution is performed. In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by means, the gaming board and the gaming board are provided. By a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area, a detecting means for detecting the passage of the gaming ball when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the gaming area, and a detecting means thereof. A payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the passage of the game balls in the predetermined area is detected, and an output means for outputting music at least during a period in which the player is playing a game. Based on the determination means for determining the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means and the detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area, the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is detected. A setting means for setting the sound of the notification sound for notification, and a sounding means for causing the notification sound set by the setting means to be sounded at the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determination means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine B1, a determination is made by the determination means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display means dynamically displays the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. To. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player a hobby. When a game ball is launched by a launching means toward a game area provided on a game board and the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, the detection means detects the passage of the game ball. Then, when the detection means detects the passage of the game balls in the predetermined area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player by the payout means. In addition, music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the player is playing the game. The timing of the beat of the music output by this output means is determined by the determination means. On the other hand, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means, the sounding of the notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is set by the setting means. Then, the set notification sound is pronounced by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the judging means. That is, when the game ball launched toward the game area passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, the notification sound for notifying the passage is at least during the period during which the player is playing the game. It is pronounced according to the timing of the beat of the output music. As a result, the notification sound that also means the payout of the game ball is pronounced according to the rhythm of the music, so that the player listens to the notification sound that also means the payout of the game ball while riding on the rhythm of the music. , The fun of the game can be enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the game machine B1, the determination means determines not only the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, but also the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts. The sounding means is the notification sound whose sound is set by the setting means, and when the number of unsounding notification sounds is a predetermined number or more, the equally divided position determined by the determination means. The gaming machine B2, characterized in that the notification sound is produced by using timing as well.

According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1. That is, in addition to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts is determined by the determination means. Then, when the number of unpronounced notification sounds is a predetermined number or more in the notification sound whose sound is set by the setting means, the timing of the equally divided position determined by the determination means is also used. , The notification sound is produced by the sounding means. As a result, when a large number of game balls pass through a predetermined area of the game board, the notification sound is not only at the timing of the beat of the music but also at the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into sub-numbers. Is pronounced, so a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the notification sound. Therefore, the more complicated the rhythm is carved, the more the game balls pass through the predetermined area, that is, the more game balls are paid out. Therefore, by engraving a complicated rhythm of the notification sound with respect to the music output from the output means, the player can be entertained by the rhythm, and the player is informed that many game balls are paid out. It has the effect of being easily notified.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the establishment of the predetermined starting condition includes the case where the passage of the gaming ball in the predetermined region is detected by the detecting means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area, the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Therefore, the determination means makes a determination, and the identification information is displayed on the display means based on the determination result. The dynamic display of is executed by the dynamic display execution means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. As a result, a notification sound that means not only the payout of the game ball but also the dynamic display of the identification information that leads to the addition of the predetermined game value is sounded in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can hear the notification sound. By listening to the music while riding the rhythm of the music, you can raise your expectations for the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the detecting means is provided in the gaming area, and the gaming ball passes through an area configured so that the gaming ball can pass only during a period in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player. The gaming machine B4, characterized in that it detects the passage of the gaming ball when it has passed.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball passes through an area provided in the game area and configured so that the game ball can pass only during the period in which the player is given a predetermined game value, the passage of the game ball is the detection means. Detected by. Then, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in this region by the detection means, the sounding of the notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball is set by the setting means. Then, the set notification sound is pronounced by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the judging means. In this way, when the game ball passes through the area configured so that the game ball can pass only during the period in which the player is given a predetermined game value, the notification sound is pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the music. Will be done. Since this notification sound notifies the passage of the game ball to a special area during the period when the predetermined game value is given, the player listens to the notification sound with joy while matching the rhythm of the music. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

A determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result by the determination means are provided, and dynamic display execution is performed. At least the period during which the player is playing a game on the gaming machine that gives the player a predetermined gaming value when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. It is provided with an output means for outputting music inside and a sounding means for sounding a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, and the sounding means is the pronunciation. It is provided with a chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing of making the music, and a pitch determining means for determining the pitch of the notification sound to be pronounced based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

According to the gaming machine C1, a determination is made by the determination means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display means dynamically displays the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. To. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player a hobby. In addition, music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the player is playing the game. On the other hand, triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is produced by the sounding means. At this time, the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is sounded is specified by the chord specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified chord. As a result, the notification sound is not only pronounced according to the rhythm of the music, but also at a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C1, the pitch determining means determines the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded from among the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means. ..

According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1. That is, since the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded is determined by the pitch determination means from the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means, the notification sound is formed with a musical chord and a chord. It is pronounced at the pitch. Therefore, it is possible to play a pleasant melody that constitutes music and chords by the notification sound, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, when the chord specified by the chord specifying means is changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch determining means causes the notification sound to be sounded at that timing. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that the root sound of the chord is determined as the pitch.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a chord is specified by a chord specifying means, if the specified chord is changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at that timing is set as the pitch of the chord. The root note is determined by the pitch determining means. When a sound with a pitch other than the root sound of the chord is output as a notification sound at the timing of the beat when the chord of the music is changed, the player recognizes the notification sound as a sound deviating from the chord, and the player May make you feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, by making the notification sound having the root sound as the pitch, the player can hear the notification sound as a sound matching the changed chord. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can hear a sound that is comfortable to listen to.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the chord specifying means is combined with the chord of the music at the timing of sounding, and the code of the music at the timing when the notification sound is sounded before the timing of sounding. And the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is pronounced after the timing of making the sound, and the pitch determining means is the same chord for each chord specified by the chord specifying means. If the pitch of the notification sound that is pronounced before the timing of this pronunciation is the constituent sound of the chord, the elapsed sound of the chord is determined as the pitch of the notification sound that is pronounced at this timing. A game machine C4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in addition to the music chord at the timing of the current pronunciation, the music chord at the timing when the notification sound is pronounced before the timing of the pronunciation and the notification sound are pronounced after the timing of the pronunciation. The chord of the music at the timing is specified by the chord specifying means. Then, if each of the specified chords is the same chord and the pitch of the notification sound sounded before the timing of sounding is the constituent sound of the chord, the notification sound to be sounded at this timing is used. As the pitch, the elapsed note of the chord is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound accompanied by the music is generated by inserting the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord and the notification sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the music chord. It is possible to give variation to the melody by sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the melody by the notification sound does not become monotonous, and the voice output that does not make the player bored can be performed.

In the game machine C4, the pitch determining means determines the constituent sound of the chord as the pitch of the notification sound at the timing when the notification sound is pronounced after the pronunciation timing of the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound. A game machine C5 characterized by determining.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the chord configuration is set as the pitch of the notification sound at the timing when the notification sound is pronounced after the pronunciation timing of the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound. The sound is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound having the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch is sandwiched between the notification sounds having the constituent sounds of the chord as the pitch, so that the notification sound having the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch is produced. Even in such a case, there is an effect that the melody played by the notification sound can be heard by the player without discomfort as if it were in the chord of the music.

In the game machine C4 or C5, in the pitch determining means, each chord specified by the chord specifying means is the same chord, and the pitch of the notification sound pronounced before the timing of making the sound is the pitch. If it is a constituent sound of a chord, the pitch of the elapsed sound is calculated as the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent tone, and the main tone of the music. The gaming machine C6, which is characterized by being calculated by the above.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, from each chord specified by the chord specifying means, that is, the music chord at the timing of sounding, the music chord at the timing when the notification sound is sounded before the timing of sounding, and the timing of sounding. If the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is sounded later is the same chord, and the pitch of the notification sound sounded before the timing of sounding is the constituent sound of the chord. The pitch of the elapsed sound is calculated by the pitch determining means as the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent tones, and the main tone of the music. Therefore, in order to determine the elapsed note, it is not necessary to prepare a table for determining the elapsed note in association with the chord of the music, the pitch of the previously pronounced constituent note, and the main tone of the music. , The memory area for storing the table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming board, the launching means for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area provided in the gaming board, and the gaming ball in the predetermined area provided in the gaming area. A detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball when it has passed, and a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area. , And the sounding means sounds a notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means. A gaming machine C7 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball is launched by a launching means toward a game area provided on the game board and the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, the detection means detects the passage of the game ball. To. Then, when the detection means detects the passage of the game balls in the predetermined area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player by the payout means. Further, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means, a notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is produced by the sounding means. At this time, the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is sounded is specified by the chord specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified chord. As a result, each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area where a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out by the payout means, the notification sound is sounded at a pitch matching the chord progression of the music. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can further enhance the joy of paying out the game ball by the melody that matches the chord progression of the music played by the notification sound.

In any of the game machines C1 to C7, a determination means for determining the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, and a determination means for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of the event caused by the progress of the game. The sounding means includes a setting means for setting the sound of the notification sound, and the sounding means causes the notification sound set by the setting means to sound at the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determination means. C8 characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined by the determination means. In addition, the sound of the notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is set by the setting means, triggered by the occurrence of the event caused by the progress of the game. Then, the set notification sound is pronounced by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the judging means. That is, the notification sound is sounded at least in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output during the period during which the player is playing the game. As a result, the melody that matches the rhythm and chord of the music is played by the notification sound, so that the player can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

A determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result by the determination means are provided, and dynamic display execution is performed. At least the period during which the player is playing a game in the gaming machine that gives the player a predetermined gaming value when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. Display control that controls the display of a new image, the stop of an image, or the erasure of an image on the display means according to the output means for outputting music and the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by providing means and means.

According to the gaming machine D1, a determination is made by the determination means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display means dynamically displays the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. To. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player a hobby. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the player is playing the game. The display control means controls the display of a new image, the stop of the image, or the erasure of the image on the display means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. That is, a new image is displayed on the display means, the image is stopped, or the image is erased in accordance with the rhythm of the music output by the output means. As a result, the image displayed on the display means can be visually recognized according to the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, which has the effect of enhancing the interest in the game. be.

In the gaming machine D1, the display control means simulates the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means at least once in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. The gaming machine D2, which is characterized by controlling the stop display.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, the display control means controls the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means to be stopped and displayed at least once in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to show the player that the dynamic display of the identification information, together with the rhythm of the music, repeats the pseudo stop display and raises the expectation of becoming a big hit, for example. Along with the rhythm of the music, you can enhance the interest in the game. In this way, the dynamic display of the identification information can also give the player the feeling that it is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, as a setting means for setting a sound to be sounded in accordance with the display of a new image, the stop of the image, or the deletion of the image performed by the display means under the control of the display control means. D3 is a gaming machine D3, comprising: a sounding means for making the sound set by the setting means sound in accordance with the timing of beats of music output from the output means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, under the control of the display control means, the sound to be sounded in accordance with the display of a new image, the stop of the image, or the deletion of the image performed by the display means is set by the setting means. Then, the set sound is pronounced by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output from the output means. As a result, not only is the display means displaying a new image, stopping the image, or erasing the image according to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, but also the sound corresponding to the display is output. It is pronounced according to the timing of the beat of the music output by the means. Therefore, not only the image displayed on the display means can be visually recognized according to the rhythm of the music, but also the sound can be listened to, so that the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music. It has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means are provided, and the dynamic display is executed. At least the period during which the player is playing a game in the gaming machine that gives the player a predetermined gaming value when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. An output means for outputting music is provided therein, and the dynamic display executing means cannot visually recognize the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine E1 comprising a starting means for starting a state.

According to the gaming machine E1, a determination is made by the determination means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display means dynamically displays the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. To. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player a hobby. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the player is playing the game. In accordance with the timing of the beat of the output music, the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information is started by the starting means. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the dynamic display of the identification information is started at the timing of the beat of the music, and the game feels as if the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music. Can make people. Therefore, the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and has the effect of enhancing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine E1, when the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the start means displays the identification information from the start timing to the timing of the beat of the music. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it is dynamically displayed in a visible state and starts an invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a visible state from the start timing to the timing of the beat of the music. At the timing of the beat, the starting means executes the dynamic display of the identification information so as to start the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information. As a result, even if the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the music beat, the player seems to have started the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the timing of the music beat. Can be shown to. Therefore, there is an effect that the dynamic display of the identification information can make the player feel as if it is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music.

In the gaming machines E1 or E2, the dynamic display executing means includes a stop display executing means that executes a stop display in the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the timing of the beat of music output by the output means. The gaming machine E3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the stop display in the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the stop display execution means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the music, and the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music. You can make a player. Therefore, the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and has the effect of enhancing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine E3, when the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the stop display execution means dynamically displays the identification information at the timing of the beat of the music. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the identification information is dynamically displayed in a visible state, and then the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. ..

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the music beat, the dynamic display of the identification information is pseudo-stopped and displayed at the timing of the music beat, and then the identification information is visually recognized. After the dynamic display is performed in a possible state, the stop display executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information so that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. As a result, even if the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the music beat, the player is stopped and displayed the dynamic display of the identification information according to the timing of the music beat. You can make it look as if it were. Therefore, there is an effect that the dynamic display of the identification information can make the player feel as if it is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information started by the start means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. , The gaming machine E5 characterized in that the identification information is dynamically displayed at high speed.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the high-speed dynamic display of the identification information is started by the starting means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the dynamic display of the identification information is started at the timing of the beat of the music, and the game feels as if the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music. Can make people. Therefore, the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and has the effect of enhancing the interest in the game.

A determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means are provided, and the dynamic display is executed. An operating means that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. Determines the operation detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated, the output means for outputting music at least during the period during which the player is playing a game, and the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. By the determination means to be performed, the setting means for setting the sound of the notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, and the setting means thereof. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by comprising a sounding means for making the set notification sound sound in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine F1, a determination is made by the determination means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display means dynamically displays the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. To. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player a hobby. Further, an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operation means is operated, the operation is detected by the operation detection means. On the other hand, music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the player is playing the game. The timing of the beat of the music output by this output means is determined by the determination means. Here, based on the fact that the operation of the operation means is detected by the operation detection means, the sound of the notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed is set by the setting means. Then, the set notification sound is pronounced by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the judging means. That is, when the player operates the operating means, the notification sound is sounded at the timing of the beat of the music. As a result, the player can enhance the enjoyment of the game by listening to the notification sound while riding on the rhythm of the music. Further, in order to listen to the notification sound in the rhythm of the music, the operation of the operating means can be enjoyed, and the operating means can be positively operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the game machine F1, the determination means determines not only the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, but also the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts. The sounding means is the notification sound whose sound is set by the setting means, and when the number of unsounding notification sounds is a predetermined number or more, the equally divided position determined by the determination means. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the notification sound is produced by using timing as well.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are played. That is, in addition to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts is determined by the determination means. Then, when the number of unpronounced notification sounds is a predetermined number or more in the notification sound whose sound is set by the setting means, the timing of the equally divided position determined by the determination means is also used. , The notification sound is produced by the sounding means. As a result, when the player operates the operating means multiple times at short intervals, not only the timing of the beat of the music but also the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into sub-numbers. However, since the notification sound is produced, a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the notification sound. Therefore, by engraving a complicated rhythm of the notification sound with respect to the music output from the output means, the player can be entertained by the rhythm, and the notification sound of the complicated rhythm can be listened to positively. There is an effect that the operating means can be operated by the player.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the sounding means is the sound of the notification sound to be sounded based on the chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing of making the sound and the chord specified by the chord specifying means. The gaming machine F3 is provided with a pitch determining means for determining the pitch.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is sounded is specified by the chord specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified chord. As a result, the notification sound is not only pronounced according to the rhythm of the music, but also at a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced. Further, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means in order to listen to the melody.

A determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result by the determination means are provided, and dynamic display execution is performed. An operating means that can be operated by a player in a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined gaming value when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. The operation of the operation means is detected by the operation detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated, the output means for outputting music at least during the period during which the player is playing the game, and the operation detection means. Based on this, a sounding means for sounding a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed is provided, and the sounding means includes a code specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing of sounding. The gaming machine F4 is characterized by comprising a sound pitch determining means for determining the pitch of the notification sound to be pronounced based on the chord specified by the code specifying means.

According to the gaming machine F4, a determination is made by the determination means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display means dynamically displays the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. To. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player a hobby. Further, an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operation means is operated, the operation is detected by the operation detection means. On the other hand, music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the player is playing the game. Then, based on the fact that the operation of the operation means is detected by the operation detection means, a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed is produced by the sounding means. At this time, the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is sounded is specified by the chord specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified chord. As a result, the notification sound is not only pronounced according to the rhythm of the music, but also at a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced. Further, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means in order to listen to the melody.

In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the pitch determining means determines the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded from among the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means. Machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3 or F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded is determined by the pitch determination means from the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means, the notification sound is simply pronounced according to the rhythm of the music. Not only is it pronounced at the pitch at which the chords and chords of the music are formed. Therefore, it is possible to play a pleasant melody that constitutes music and chords by the notification sound, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the pitch determining means causes the chord specified by the chord specifying means to sound at the timing when the chord is changed to a new chord at that timing. The gaming machine F6, characterized in that the root sound of the chord is determined as the pitch of the notification sound.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the following effects are played. That is, when a chord is specified by a chord specifying means, if the specified chord is changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at that timing is set as the pitch of the chord. The root note is determined by the pitch determining means. When a sound with a pitch other than the root sound of the chord is output as a notification sound at the timing of the beat when the chord of the music is changed, the player recognizes the notification sound as a sound deviating from the chord, and the player May make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a risk that the player may stop operating the operating means. On the other hand, by making the notification sound having the root sound as the pitch, the player can hear the notification sound as a sound matching the changed chord. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can hear a sound that is comfortable to listen to.

In any of the game machines F3 to F6, the chord specifying means is combined with the chord of the music at the timing of sounding, and the code of the music at the timing when the notification sound is sounded before the timing of sounding. And the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is sounded after the timing of making the sound, and the pitch determining means is the same chord for each chord specified by the chord specifying means. If the pitch of the notification sound that is sounded before the timing of this sound is the constituent sound of the chord, the elapsed sound of the chord is determined as the pitch of the notification sound that is sounded at this timing. A game machine F7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in addition to the music chord at the timing of the current pronunciation, the music chord at the timing when the notification sound is pronounced before the timing of the pronunciation and the notification sound are pronounced after the timing of the pronunciation. The chord of the music at the timing is specified by the chord specifying means. Then, if each of the specified chords is the same chord and the pitch of the notification sound sounded before the timing of sounding is the constituent sound of the chord, the notification sound to be sounded at this timing is used. As the pitch, the elapsed note of the chord is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound is produced while matching the rhythm of the music and inserting the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord, mixed with the notification sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord of the music. Therefore, it is possible to give variation to the melody by the notification sound accompanied by music. Therefore, there is an effect that the melody by the notification sound does not become monotonous, and the voice output that does not make the player bored can be performed.

In the game machine F7, the pitch determining means determines the constituent sound of the chord as the pitch of the notification sound at the timing when the notification sound is pronounced after the pronunciation timing of the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound. A game machine F8 characterized by determining.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, the chord configuration is set as the pitch of the notification sound at the timing when the notification sound is pronounced after the pronunciation timing of the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound. The sound is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound having the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch is sandwiched between the notification sounds having the constituent sounds of the chord as the pitch, so that the notification sound having the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch is produced. Even in such a case, there is an effect that the melody played by the notification sound can be heard by the player without discomfort as if it were in the chord of the music.

In the game machine F7 or F8, the pitch determining means has the same chord for each chord specified by the chord specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound pronounced before the timing of making the sound is the pitch. If it is a constituent sound of a chord, the pitch of the elapsed sound is calculated as the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent tone, and the main tone of the music. The gaming machine F9, which is characterized by being calculated by the above.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7 or F8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, from each chord specified by the chord specifying means, that is, the music chord at the timing of sounding, the music chord at the timing when the notification sound is sounded before the timing of sounding, and the timing of sounding. If the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is sounded later is the same chord, and the pitch of the notification sound sounded before the timing of sounding is the constituent sound of the chord. The pitch of the elapsed sound is calculated by the pitch determining means as the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent tones, and the main tone of the music. Therefore, in order to determine the elapsed note, it is not necessary to prepare a table for determining the elapsed note in association with the chord of the music, the pitch of the previously pronounced constituent note, and the main tone of the music. , The memory area for storing the table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

A determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means are provided, and the dynamic display is executed. A movable accessory that operates based on the progress of a game in a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. And, according to the drive means for driving the movable accessory, the output means for outputting music at least during the period when the game is being played by the player, and the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. The gaming machine G1 comprising: a drive control means for controlling the drive means so that the movable accessory operates.

According to the gaming machine G1, a determination is made by the determination means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display means dynamically displays the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. To. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player a hobby. Further, a movable accessory that operates based on the progress of the game is provided, and the movable accessory is driven by the driving means. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the player is playing the game. The drive means is controlled by the drive control means so that the movable accessory operates according to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. As a result, since the movable accessory operates according to the rhythm of the music, the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

A determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means are provided, and the dynamic display is executed. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, in a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to the player, light emission that lights up or blinks based on the progress of the game. The light emitting means is turned on or blinks according to the means, the output means for outputting music at least during the period in which the game is being played by the player, and the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine G2 comprising: a light emitting control means for controlling.

According to the gaming machine G2, a determination is made by the determination means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display means dynamically displays the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. To. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player a hobby. In addition, a light emitting means that lights up or blinks based on the progress of the game is provided. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the player is playing the game. The light emitting means is controlled by the light emitting control means so that the light emitting means lights up or blinks according to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. As a result, the light emitting means lights up or blinks in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game according to the rhythm of the music, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

A determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result by the determination means are provided, and dynamic display execution is performed. At least the period during which the player is playing a game on the gaming machine that gives the player a predetermined gaming value when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. It is provided with an output means for outputting music into the sound, and a sounding means for sounding a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of the event, and the sounding means is the output. The main tone specifying means for specifying the main tone of the music output by the means, the chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing of sounding, the chord specified by the chord specifying means, and the specifying by the main tone specifying means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by comprising a sound pitch determining means for determining the pitch of the notification sound to be pronounced based on the main tone.

According to the gaming machine H1, a determination is made by the determination means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display means dynamically displays the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. To. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player a hobby. In addition, music is output by the output means at least during the period in which the player is playing the game. On the other hand, triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is produced by the sounding means. At this time, the main key of the music output by the output means is specified by the main key specifying means, and the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is sounded is specified by the chord specifying means. Then, based on the specified chord and the main tone of the music, the pitch of the notification sound to be pronounced is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound is pronounced at a pitch that matches the chord progression according to the scale determined by the main tone of the music, so that a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the game machine H1, the pitch determining means is based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means and the main key specified by the main key specifying means, and is described from the relationship between the tonic of the main tone and the chord. The gaming machine H2 characterized in that the pitch of the notification sound is calculated according to the scale determined by the main tone.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means and the main tone specified by the main tone specifying means, the pitch of the notification sound is changed from the relationship between the main tone of the main tone and the chord according to the scale determined by the main tone. Calculated by high determination means. The pitch can be determined by calculation in this way, because the scale determined according to the tonic set for the music is the pitch (sound) of each note that constitutes the scale only by changing the pitch of the tonic of that main tone. This is because the relationship of height) is always constant. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a table for determining the pitch, and a memory area for storing the table is not required. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1, and H2, the gaming machine is characterized by being a slot machine. Game machine I1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1, and H2, the gaming machine is characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine I2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1, and H2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being fused. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various production images such as variable effects (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on display means such as liquid crystal displays to improve the interest of games (for example). Patent Document 1). The variable effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters the ball entry port (starting opening) (starting winning prize). For example, three horizontal or vertical scrolls or 3 × 3 squares in the effective display area. A total of 9 symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols, etc. displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stop symbols are in a predetermined combination at the predetermined stop position. It causes a big hit when there is. While such an effect is being performed, background music (Back Ground Music: BGM) is output from the gaming machine to further enhance the interest of the gaming (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-046635). ).
However, in a conventional gaming machine, the background music is simply played from the speaker, and the player does not find the background music interesting, which is useful for improving the interest of the game. There was a situation that there was no such thing.
This technical idea was made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by using music output at least during the period during which the game is being played. The purpose is.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 Frame button (operation means)
60 Game board 64 First ball entrance (detection means)
65a Special winning opening (detection means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
87 First character (movable character)
87a Motor for vertical movement of the first accessory (driving means)
87e 1st accessory rotation motor (driving means)
110 Main controller (main control means)
111 Payout control device (payout means)
112a Ball launch unit (launching means)
113 Voice lamp control device (sound control means, drive control means, light emission control means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display execution means, display control means)
227 Lamp display device (light emitting means)
S1207 Fluctuation start processing (determination means)
S1907 (setting means, operation detecting means)
S2010 (setting means)
S2121 (judgment means)
S2129 (setting means)
S2131 (pronunciation means)
S2135 Start winning sound output processing (pronunciation means)
S2137 Frame button operation sound output processing (pronunciation means)
S2144 (output means)
S2145 (acquisition means)
S2161, S2171, S2177 (code identification means)
S2159, S2161, S2164 (Pitch determination means)
S2174, S2177 (Pitch determination means)
S3611 (output start determination means)
S3612 (Transmission means)
S3613 (acquisition means)
S3616 (Notification means)
S3807 (output means)
S4001 (Judgment means)
S4203 (acquisition means)
S4206 (Notification means)
S4401, S4402 (Pitch determination means)

Claims (1)

A determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result by the determination means are provided, and dynamic display execution is performed. In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by means.
At least an output means that outputs music while the game is being played by the player,
A sounding means for sounding a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of an event triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game is provided.
The pronunciation method is
As the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded, it is characterized by comprising a pitch selection means in which the pitch corresponding to the music output at the timing of sounding the notification sound is selected based on the progressing music. A game machine.

Images